EcoStruxure™

PME/EBO Integration
Solution Guide
7EN02-0464-00
05/2021
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its subsidiaries
referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its subsidiaries. All other brands
may be trademarks of their respective owners.

This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished for
informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the
prior written permission of Schneider Electric.

Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide or its content,
except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as is" basis. Schneider Electric
products and equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel.

As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information contained in this
guide may be subject to change without notice.

To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by Schneider

Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational content of this material
or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Safety Information
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the
device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a "Danger" or "Warning" safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury
if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.

A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction, installation, and
operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.
Safety Information EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Contents
Safety Information 3
Safety Precautions 8
Overview 9
About This Document 10
Applicability 10
Target Audience 10
Solution Components 11
Building Operation 3.2.3 11
Power Monitoring Expert 2021 11
EcoStruxure™ Web Services (EWS) 11
SmartWidgets 11
Extract Transform Load (ETL) Tool 11
Solution Limitations 12
Resources 13
Supporting Documentation 13
Other 13
Design 14
1. Software compatibility 15
Building Operation and PME version compatibility 15
Operating Environment 16
Port Settings 17
2. Computer hardware 19
PME 19
Building Operation 24
PME and Building Operation on the same computer 24
3. Solution architectures 25
Architecture 1 – Devices Connected to Building Operation 26
Architecture 2 – Devices Connected to PME 26
Real-time Data Flow 27
Alarms Data Flow 27
Historical Data Flow 27
4. Guidance on choosing an architecture 29
Data Collection 29
User experience 32
Commissioning time 34
IT Considerations 34
5. Communications and data transfer 35
Architecture 1 35
Architecture 2 36
6. Commissioning time 43
Architecture 1 43

4 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Safety Information

Architecture 2 44
Estimation Guidelines 45
Installing 46
1. Downloading the PME/EBO Integration Toolkit 47
2. Installing Building Operation 48
3. Installing the components, snippets, and binding template 50
Installing Components and Snippets 50
Importing the Binding Template 50
4. Installing PME 51
Installing the PME software 51
Activating the licenses for PME 51
5. Installing ETL (only for Architecture 1 solutions) 53
Configuring 54
1. Configuring server settings 55
PME server 55
Building Operation server 55
2. Configuring Communications 56
Architecture 1 56
Architecture 2 64
3. Configuring PME Web Applications 72
4. Integrating PME Web applications in Building Operation 73
Prerequisites 73
Configuring web applications and generating the configuration import file for Building
Operation 73
Importing the configuration file into Building Operation 75
Setting up EWS credentials in PME (server) and Building Operation (client) 76
Enabling embedded content in PME and Building Operation 77
5. Setting up Graphics in Building Operation 80
Building Operation Components and Snippets 80
Setting up Electrical Network Graphics 81
Binding Graphics to measurements 83
6. Configuring Dashboards and Slideshows 85
Adding a new dashboard 86
Editing a dashboard 87
Sharing a dashboard 88
Moving a dashboard 89
Deleting a dashboard 89
Set default options for a dashboard 90
Configuring a slideshow 91
Adding a gadget to a dashboard 93
Editing a gadget 94
Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard 94
Operating 96
1. Accessing Dashboards and Slideshows 97

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 5

Safety Information EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Viewing Dashboards 97
Dashboard Slideshows 98
Playing a Slideshow 98
2. Accessing Reports 99
Report templates 100
Subscriptions 100
Generating a report 100
Downloading a report 100
3. Accessing Alarms 102
4. Accessing EWS real-time values (only for Architecture 2 solutions) 103
5. Accessing device diagrams (only for Architecture 2 solutions) 105
Reference 107
Add-on device drivers for PME 108
Advanced ETL Configuration References 109
Position Counters 109
Logging setup 110
Extract task: Setting parameters and recommended values 111
Transform task: Setting parameters and recommended values 113
Load task: Setting parameters and recommended values 114
Manage ETL jobs 116
Tips for working with mappings 117
Measurement mapping for ETL 119
ETL tips and tricks 134
Measurement mapping for ETL 139
Configuring the PME EWS server for HTTPS 155
Configuring the PME EWS server regional setting 156
Database growth calculations 157
Factory default measurement logging 157
Custom measurement logging 157
Power quality event logging 157
Default device type support 159
Deploying and configuring a Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar graphic component 165
Deploying and configuring a Single-input Thermometer graphic component 168
Exposing custom device driver measurements through EWS 171
Manual integration steps without using the web application Integration Utility settings 173
Creating PME users for Building Operation 173
Creating Diagrams, Reports, and Dashboards links in Building Operation 173
Hosting EWS values in Building Operation 174
PME IP Ports 181
Setting SQL Server memory options 183
Terms and definitions 185
Time synchronization for ION meters 187
Enabling and configuring time synchronization 187
Using Table gadget in Slideshow 188

6 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Safety Information

Web Applications settings 189

Personal Preferences 190
Report Theme 190
System Language 191
System Theme 191
Diagnostics and Usage 193
Registration 194
Set Diagrams control options 195
Login Options 196
Session Timeout 197
Authorized Hosts 197
Integration Utility 198
Rate Editor 199
Device Manager 199
Hierarchy Manager 227
Log Viewer 240
Configuring the Energy Modeling report 242
User Manager 260
System and personal localization settings 296
Customizing the Web Applications links 297
Web security changes 303
User authentication 303
Setting Up User Authentication with Windows Active Directory in Building Operation 303

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 7

Safety Precautions EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Safety Precautions
During installation or use of this software, pay attention to all safety messages that occur in the
software and that are included in the documentation. The following safety messages apply to this
software in its entirety.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software or devices for critical control or protection applications where human
or equipment safety relies on the operation of the control action.
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices to help prevent unauthorized access to the software.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Work with facility IT System Administrators to ensure that the system adheres to the site-specific
cybersecurity policies.

8 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Overview

Overview
The integration of PME with EBO – hereafter referred to as PME/EBO Integration solution – is an
engineered solution that embeds features of EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert (PME) into
EcoStruxure™ Building Operation (Building Operation).

The PME/EBO Integration solution provides access to PME Dashboards, Reports, Diagrams,
alarm and real-time data through Building Operation, for a seamless user experience.

PME/EBO Integration solution is intended for large buildings, such as high-rise commercial office
buildings, shopping malls, and university campuses. It provides easy to understand energy
information for building managers with limited electrical systems knowledge.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 9

Overview EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

About This Document

Applicability
This guide applies to the PME/EBO Integration solution only. The PME/EBO Integration solution is
based on Power Monitoring Expert 2021 and Building Operation 3.2.3.

Target Audience
This guide is intended for Application Engineers, third-party integrators, and other qualified
personnel who are responsible for installing and integrating PME with Building Operation.

The deployment of the PME/EBO Integration solution requires application engineering expertise in
installing and configuring Building Operation and PME.

10 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Overview

Solution Components
The PME/EBO Integration solution includes the following components:

Building Operation 3.2.3

Building Operation software provides integrated monitoring, control and management of energy,
HVAC systems, lighting and fire safety systems. It is a centralized system with scalability from a
single building to a global enterprise.

Power Monitoring Expert 2021

Power Monitoring Expert is a supervisory software for power management applications. It enables
you to maximize operational efficiency, optimize your power distribution system, and improve your
bottom-line performance.

EcoStruxure™ Web Services (EWS)

EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) is a Schneider Electric standard for sharing data among various
EcoStruxure software platforms to facilitate the creation of EcoStruxure solutions. EWS is based
on conventional Web Services technology (SOAP, WSDL) and provides a way for solution
architects and solution development teams to build solutions that require data to be shared among
different EcoStruxure software platforms.

SmartWidgets
SmartWidgets are device driver packages for Building Operation. SmartWidgets make it fast and
easy for you to add devices like Power Meters to the software. They are easy to install, and they
provide Modbus register mappings for the common measurements for a given device type. They
also provide Building Operation graphics components for consistent visualization and interaction
with devices.

Extract Transform Load (ETL) Tool

The Extract, Transform, Load (ETL) tool connects to the Building Operation EWS server on either
Enterprise Server or Application Server, extracts select historical data from trend logs, and inserts
the data into the PME database. This makes trend data from Building Operation available to PME
Dashboards and Reports.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 11

Overview EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Solution Limitations
Only the PME features that are embedded in Building Operation and that are described in this
document are available in the PME/EBO Integration solution.

The following additional features are available in a fully licensed version of the PME software:

• Web Clients with access to Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, Reports

• Embeddable Web Applications: Trends, Alarms

• Engineering Tools: Vista, Designer, Virtual Processor (VIP)

• Power Quality Analysis Features such as Waveform Viewer, Harmonics Analysis, Phasor
Diagram, and so on

• Power Quality Reports

Only the PME Standalone Architecture installation type, where the PME application server and the
database server are installed on the same computer, is supported by the PME/EBO Integration
solution. The PME Distributed Database architecture installation type is not supported. See the
EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide for more information on PME installation
architectures.

12 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Overview

Resources
Supporting Documentation
• EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert 2021 System Guide

• Architectural Guidelines - EcoStruxure Building Operation

• IT System Planning Guide - EcoStruxure Building Management

• EcoStruxure Building Operation - System Reference Guide

• EcoStruxure Building Operation - Technical Reference Guide

• EcoStruxure Building Operation IT Reference Guide

Other
• PME Device Driver Summary Spreadsheet (shows native and downloadable drivers; includes
links to downloadable drivers)

• PME Device Driver downloads (SE, LE- Enter the device name in the search box to find the
driver)

• PME Device Driver downloads (CE)

• Power Monitoring Expert Design and Quote tools:

Daisy Chain Calculator

Commissioning Time Calculator

Database Growth Calculator

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 13

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Design
This chapter includes the following topics:

1. Software compatibility

2. Computer hardware

3. Solution architectures

4. Guidance on choosing an architecture

5. Communications and data transfer

6. Commissioning time

14 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

1. Software compatibility
This section describes the PME/EBO Integration solution software compatibility as well as the
operating environment requirements.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Activate product and component licenses prior to the expiry of the trial license.
• Activate sufficient licenses for the servers and devices in your system.
• Export the existing hierarchy template out of Power Monitoring Expert before importing a new
template. The new template can overwrite the existing template, which can permanently
remove all information contained in the original.
• Backup or archive any SQL Server database data before adjusting any database memory
options.
• Only personnel with advanced knowledge of SQL Server databases should make database
parameter changes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.

NOTICE
UNAUTHORIZED OR UNINTENDED ACCESS TO CUSTOMER DATA
• Personnel setting up the PME/EBO Integration third-party authentication must be aware that
links to data are not secure.
• Do not setup access links to sensitive or secure data.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unauthorized or unintended access to
sensitive or secure customer data.

Building Operation and PME version compatibility

The PME/EBO Integration solution supports the following software versions:

EBO EBO EBO

PME Version SBO 1.6 SBO 1.7 SBO 1.8 SBO 1.9
2.0 3.0.1 3.2.3
8.0 Y Y
8.1 Y Y Y
8.2 Y Y Y
9.0 Y Y
2020 Y
2021 Y

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 15

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Operating Environment
PME
PME supports the following environments and software:

NOTE: The operating system and SQL Server combination you choose must be supported by
Microsoft. This applies to edition, version, and 32-/64-bit.

Software Supported Versions

Windows 10 Professional/Enterprise
Windows Server 2012 Standard
Operating system Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard/Enterprise
Windows Server 2016 Standard
Windows Server 2019 Standard
SQL Server 2012 Express
SQL Server 2014 Express
SQL Server 2016 Express
SQL Server 2017 Express
SQL Server 2019 Express (included with PME 2021 )
Database system**
SQL Server 2012 Standard/Enterprise/Business Intelligence
SQL Server 2014 Standard/Enterprise/Business Intelligence
SQL Server 2016 Standard/Enterprise/Business Intelligence
SQL Server 2017 Standard/Enterprise/Business Intelligence
SQL Server 2019 Standard/Enterprise/Business Intelligence
VMWare Workstation 10
VMWare ESX1 6.0
Oracle Virtual Box 5.0.4
Virtual environment*** Microsoft Hyper-V from Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012
Citrix XenServer 6.2
Parallels Desktop 10
QEMU-KVM
Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel 2013, 2016, 365
Google Chrome version 42 and later
Mozilla Firefox version 35 and later
Desktop Web browser
Apple Safari versions 7 or 8 and later
Microsoft Edge
Mobile Web browser Safari on iOS8.3+ operating systems, Chrome on Android systems
.NET Framework .NET 4.6 or higher

** PME includes a free version of SQL Server Express. You have the option to install this Express
version during the installation of PME, if you don't want to use a different SQL Server.

*** You must configure virtual environments with a supported Windows operating system and SQL
Server edition. It is possible to mix virtual and non-virtual environments for PME server and clients.

16 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

NOTE: Apply the latest updates to the OS and SQL Server before installing or upgrading PME.

NOTE: PME can be installed in a domain environment. However, it cannot be installed on a

computer that is a domain controllers. If PME is installed on a server that is subsequently changed
to a domain controller, the software ceases to function correctly.

Building Operation
Refer to EcoStruxure™ Building Operation Information Technology System Planning Guide for
supported operating systems and SQL Server versions.

Integration requirements
• For deployments where Building Operation and PME are installed on the same server, the
operating environment must be supported by both systems.

• The following browsers are supported when using PME Web Applications in Building Operation
WebStation:
Microsoft Edge

Google Chrome

Mozilla Firefox

• Installing PME and Building Operation Report Server on the same computer is NOT supported.

• Sharing SQL Server between PME and Building Operation Report Server is NOT supported.

Port Settings
PME
See PME IP Ports for more information.

Building Operation
The Enterprise Server uses HTTP and TCP protocols to communicate with other servers and
clients. In the Software Administrator, you configure the port number of each protocol the Enterprise
Server listens to when communicating through a specific protocol. Refer to the IT System Planning
Guide - EcoStruxure Building Management for a full list of required open ports.

Changing Port Settings

Building Operation and PME both use the same HTTP (80) and HTTPS (443) ports by default. If you
install Enterprise Server and PME on the same computer, you must change these ports for Building
Operation to avoid a port conflict.

For example, use 8080 and 446 as shown below:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 17

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Therefore, during the design phase, the IT policy needs to be checked to make sure this is
acceptable. If it is not, PME and the Enterprise Server should not be installed on the same computer
and should instead be installed on separate servers.

18 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

2. Computer hardware
PME
Choosing Computer Type, CPU, and RAM
The computer type, CPU, and RAM determine the overall performance and reliability of the system.
CPU is important for device communications and RAM affects SQL Server performance.

As a starting point for the selection of these components, we are defining two different system
categories, Basic Systems and Advanced Systems. Decide which category best describes your
system needs and then use the information provided in the tables below to define your computer
hardware specifications.

Basic Systems
A basic system is defined by any of the following characteristics:

• Factory default measurement logging (logging frequency ≥ 15 minutes)

• No custom applications

• No Power Quality Performance monitoring

• Only a small number of branch circuit monitor devices in the system

• A mix of device type with approximately:

70% entry level devices (for example iEM3xxx)

20% intermediate level devices (for example PM55xx)

10% advanced level devices (for example ION9000)

Minimum recommended computer hardware for servers in Basic Systems:

System Size Devices Users Computer Hardware

Desktop
Small ≤ 100 ≤5 Intel Core i5 (4 core)*
8 GB (RAM)

Workstation
≤ 250 ≤ 10 Intel Xeon Bronze (6 core)*
16 GB (RAM)
Medium
Server
≤ 600 ≤ 10 Intel Xeon Bronze (8 core)*
24 GB (RAM)

Server
Large ≤ 2500 ≤ 10 Intel Xeon Silver (10 core)*
32 GB (RAM)

*Equivalent or higher processor

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 19

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Advanced Systems
An advanced system is defined by any of the following characteristics:

• Custom measurement logging with <15-minute intervals

• Custom applications using the VIP module

• Power Quality Performance monitoring

• Large number of concurrent users

• High percentage of advanced level devices in the system

• Large number of branch circuit monitor devices in the system

• Large scale data exchange with third party systems (for example through OPC, ETL, or EWS)

• Other resource intensive software systems installed on the same computer

• Distributed Database architecture

Minimum recommended computer hardware for servers in Advanced Systems:

RAM
Distributed
Distributed
Database
System OPC Computer Database
Devices Users Standalone architecture
Size Tags Hardware architecture
architecture -
- Database
Application
Server
Server

Workstation
Small ≤ 100 ≤ 15 5000 Intel Xeon W- 16 GB 16 GB 16 GB
21xx (4 Core)*

Server
Intel Xeon
≤ 250 ≤ 20 10000 24 GB 16 GB 24 GB
Bronze (8
core)*
Medium
Server
Intel Xeon
≤ 600 ≤ 35 30000 32 GB 24 GB 32 GB
Silver (10
core)*

Server
Intel Xeon
Large ≤ 2500 ≤ 50 50000 64 GB 32 GB 64 GB
Silver (12
core)*

*Equivalent or higher processor

20 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

Choosing Data Storage

The type of data storage determines the historical data access performance and the amount of
historical data that can be stored in the system. Data storage configurations are also important for
system availability and recovery.

Storage Size
The data storage must have enough space for the different programs and applications that are
running on the computer. This includes space for the historical data that is recorded by the system
and some free space as a buffer.

The following table shows the estimated storage space that is required, without the historical data
logs. The estimates are rounded up and allow for updates and system maintenance.

Component Storage Space
Windows Operating System software 100 GB
Microsoft SQL Server software 2 GB
PME software 5 GB
PME system databases 5 GB
PME historical database (see below)
Free space 30% of the storage size

PME historical database

The storage space that is required for the historical database (ION_Data), is equal to five times the
size of the main database file (ION_data.mdf):
Storage Space for ION_Data (GB) = 5x .mdf (GB)

It can be broken down into the following components, where ION_data.mdf size is the estimated
maximum size when PME is in steady-state:

Component Storage Space
Main database file (.mdf) (1x) ION_data.mdf size
Transaction log file (.ldf) (1x) ION_data.mdf size
Last two full backups (2x) ION_data.mdf size
Free Space for Backups or tempDB (1x) ION_data.mdf size
Total (5x) ION_data.mdf size

Optionally, the component can include storage of archive database when data archive and / or trim
strategy is performed. For medium to large systems (250-2,500 devices), we recommend you to
perform data archive and / or trim strategy to support healthy database. See Archive and Trim
strategy for more information.

NOTE: Use the Database Growth Calculator tool to estimate the database size for 'n' years of
archive data. The tool is available through the Exchange Community. See Resources for link
information.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 21

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

The estimates above are based on the following assumptions:

• The .ldf file is typically just 10% of the .mdf size, but occasionally expands to 100% during
normal operation.

• The system default is to keep two database backups.

• 100% of the .mdf size is required for free space. The tempDB will occasionally expand to 100%
of the total .mdf size, but not at the same time as a backup. If the backups and tempDB are on
different hard drive groups, each of them require x1 .mdf in hard drive space.

Main Database File Size (ION_data.mdf)

Unlike the system software, the historical database size is continuously growing. Its size and
growth can be estimated based on the amount of:

• Factory default measurement logging

• Custom measurement logging

• Power quality event logging

Also, the database is configured to automatically grow by 10% when required to create room for
additional measurements. This growth operation can occur at any time and you need to consider it in
the database size calculations.

NOTE: Use the Database Growth Calculator tool to estimate the database growth for your
system. The tool is available through the Exchange Community. See Resources for link
information.

For optimum performance, minimize database auto-growth by configuring the database container to
the estimated maximum size after growth. During commissioning, use the Database Growth
Calculator tool to estimate the maximum ION_Data database size based on your data retention
policy, and configure the database container to the estimated maximum value. For example, if the
ION_data database file is estimated for 2 TB and above in container size then split the database in
to multiple files. For more details on how to set database container size and / or to add new files to
be database, see Increase the Size of a Database. You can view the size of the ION_Data
database using the Database Manager tool.

Storage Performance and Availability

Storage Type

The two main storage solutions that are available are Hard Disk Drives (HDD) and Solid-State
Drives (SSD). HDDs are good at providing cheap, bulk storage for non-performance critical data.
SSDs are good at providing strategic storage for high performance data. We recommend that you
use SSDs for the Microsoft Message Queuing (MSMQ) storage in medium, large, and extra large
PME systems.

Storage Configuration

Storage drives can be configured as single drives or a number of separate drives. For a small Basic
Systems, a single drive is sufficient. For all other systems, we recommend that you divide the data
storage into different drives.

22 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

For medium to large systems (250-2,500 devices):

Drive Type Components

Software: OS, PME, SQL
SSD Databases: ApplicationModules, ION_Network, ION_SystemLog
MSMQ
HDD or SSD SQL tempdb
HDD or SSD ION_Data
HDD or SSD ION_Data.ldf
HDD or SSD ION_Data archive database, database backups

RAID Systems

In addition to separating the software components into different drive groups, redundant arrays
(RAID) can be used to improve performance and add simple redundancy. In a RAID 1 configuration,
one drive is a complete copy of a second drive. If either of the two drives stops operating, the other
takes over without any data loss. The faulty drive can then be replaced to restore the RAID
configuration.

Recommended RAID 1 configurations:

2x Drive

Group 0
Component
Drive 1+2
OS ü
tempDB ü
MDF ü
LDF ü
Backups and archive ü

4x Drive

Group 0 Group 1
Component
Drive 1+2 Drive 3+4
OS ü
tempDB ü
MDF ü
LDF ü
Backups and archive ü

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 23

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

6x Drive

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2

Component
Drive 1+2 Drive 3+4 Drive 5+6
OS ü
tempDB ü
MDF ü
LDF ü
Backups and archive ü

8x Drive

Component Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Drive 1+2 Drive 3+4 Drive 5+6 Drive 7+8
OS ü
tempDB ü
MDF ü
LDF ü
Backups and archive ü

NOTE: Plan for system growth by having a computer with space for additional drives. This makes
it easy to add additional storage as the system grows.

NOTE: It is possible to use other RAID configurations, such as RAID 0 or RAID 5. These
configurations are not discussed in this document.

Building Operation
For information on Building Operation hardware specifications, see the IT System Planning Guide -
EcoStruxure Building Management.

PME and Building Operation on the same computer

CPU and RAM
As a general guideline, we recommend that you use the PME Advanced Systems hardware
specifications for systems based on Architecture 2 where the PME and Building Operation software
is installed on the same server.

HDD
To install PME and Building Operation on the same server, add 2 GB to the required PME HDD
space for the Building Operation application and additional space for historical data in Building
Operation.

24 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

3. Solution architectures

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software or devices for critical control or protection applications where human
or equipment safety relies on the operation of the control action.
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

The PME/EBO Integration solution supports the following integration architectures:

• Architecture 1 - Devices connected to Building Operation

• Architecture 2 - Devices connected to PME

NOTE: Hybrid versions of the architectures are possible, to meet specific application needs.

The following diagram shows an integrated view of both architectures:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 25

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Architecture 1 – Devices Connected to Building Operation

• Power devices are connected to Building Operation (Automation Server or Enterprise Server).

• Logging of historical data is done by Building Operation (Automation Server or Enterprise

Server).

• Historical data (Trend Logs), for display in Dashboards and Reports, is copied from Building
Operation to PME using the ETL.

NOTE: (Optional) Historical data for simple trending can be displayed directly through Building
Operation Trend objects.

• PME serves up historical data views in its Web Applications (Dashboards, Reports) to Building
Operation through its secured Web Server.

Architecture 2 – Devices Connected to PME

• Power devices are connected to PME.

• Logging of historical data is done by PME.

NOTE: (Optional) Historical data for simple trending can be copied to Building Operation via
EWS and displayed through Trend objects.

26 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

• Real-time data and alarm data are provided to Building Operation via EWS

• PME serves up historical data views in its Web Applications (Dashboards, Reports) to Building
Operation through its Web Server

Real-time Data Flow

Regardless of how the data is collected, directly by Building Operation or by PME, it will be viewed
by the user in Building Operation user interface.

Architecture 1
Building Operation collects the real-time data from the devices through an Automation Server or
Enterprise Server.

Architecture 2
PME collects the real-time data and provides it to Building Operation through EWS.

Alarms Data Flow

All alarm data must end up in the Building Operation database, whether the alarms are triggered in
Building Operation or PME.

In Architecture 1, all alarm data is logged directly to the Building Operation database. You must
configure power alarms in Building Operation, manually, or through existing alarms in the
SmartWidget.

In Architecture 2, power alarm data is first logged to the PME database and then copied to the
Building Operation database using EWS. You must configure device based or software-based
power alarms in PME.

Historical Data Flow

Historical Data for Simple Trending in Building Operation
You can use the Building Operation Trend objects for displaying simple trend data. In this case, any
historical data collected in PME, that is to be displayed in Building Operation, needs to be copied to
Building Operation.

NOTE: This does not involve PME Dashboards or Reports.

Architecture 1

Building Operation collects the historical data directly.

Architecture 2

PME collects the historical data and copies it to Building Operation via EWS.

NOTE: The data transfer interval can be set to the PME logging interval, for example 15 minutes,
or to a longer interval, such as once per day, to transfer a larger set of data per connection.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 27

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Historical Data for Dashboards and Reports

For complex historical data and larger data sets, use the PME Dashboards and Reports
applications for displaying the data. In this case, any historical data in Building Operation that is to
be displayed in a dashboard or report needs to be copied to PME, using the ETL tool.

Architecture 1

Building Operation collects the historical data and copies it to PME, using the ETL tool.

Architecture 2

PME collects the historical data directly.

28 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

4. Guidance on choosing an architecture

There are a number of factors to consider when choosing whether to use Architecture 1,
Architecture 2, or a combination of the two. The key factors to consider are:

• Data Collection

• User experience

• Commissioning time

• IT Considerations

NOTE: Hybrid versions of the architectures are possible, to meet specific application needs.

Data Collection
To decide which architecture is best for data collection, consider the following:

A. Device type of the power monitoring devices

B. Number of registers to be requested

C. Device location

A. Device Type
Which types of power devices are used in the system is the most important aspect to consider
when selecting an architecture.

Use the flow chart below to help you with the decision-making process:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 29

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptions:
SE (Schneider Electric) device

Most of the SE meters and circuit breakers are supported in PME by default. In addition, a large
number of add-on device drivers for PME can be downloaded from the Exchange community. For
those device types that are not supported by existing drivers, you can create custom drivers with
tools provided by PME. The commissioning time is reduced when there are pre-existing drivers for
your device types in PME.

Building Operation has SmartWidgets for some of the SE power devices. For those device types
that are not supported, you must perform manual mapping in order to communicate to the device.
The commissioning time is reduced when there is a SmartWidget for your device.

NOTE: If the device uses a protocol other than Modbus, further investigation on gateways might
be needed before choosing a communication architecture.

ION meter

ION meters use ION protocol, which is supported by PME but not by Building Operation. Therefore,
it is required to connect these meters to PME (à Architecture 2).

30 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

NOTE: Most of the ION meters also support Modbus protocol. However, advanced functions,
such as waveforms, on-board logging or on-board alarms, are not available through Modbus
communication. Therefore, connecting an ION meter through Modbus is not recommended.

Multi-address device

A Multi-address device is a Modbus device that has multiple Modbus IDs, such as the Masterpact.
Multi-address devices are supported in PME but not in Building Operation. In Building Operation,
multiple Modbus devices need to be created for each multi-address device, because each Building
Operation device can only have one Modbus ID. This increases the complexity of the system tree
structure and requires more commissioning time and effort as compared to PME (à Architecture 2).
PQ (Power Quality) functions

If the devices have PQ functions and you want to make use of these functions, Architecture 2 is
recommended because PME provides access to events, waveforms, reports, and all other power
quality related information (à Architecture 2).
On-board logging

If the devices have on-board logging functions, Architecture 2 is recommended because PME can
retrieve the on-board logs instead of doing software-based logging, like Building Operation (à
Architecture 2).

NOTE: On-board data logging is typically more reliable and more accurate than software-based
logging.

On-board alarming

If the devices have on-board alarming functions, Architecture 2 is recommended because PME can
retrieve the on-board alarms instead of monitoring the values and generating alarms in the software,
like Building Operation (à Architecture 2).

NOTE: On-board alarming is typically more reliable and more accurate than software-based
alarming, which is particularly important for power failure root cause analysis.

Conclusion:

For many applications, Architecture 2 is the better choice with regards to power monitoring device
types. However, when only low-end power meters, energy meters, or pulse meters are used, there
is no difference between the two architectures.

B. Number of Registers to be Requested

If only kWh and a few power measurements are needed from a device, then either Architecture 2 or
Architecture 1 can be used, as long as the existing Automation Server can handle the Modbus serial
loop communication of the power devices.

However, if many measurements are needed for each power device, we recommend you use
Architecture 2 to keep communication of the power devices separated from the building automation
devices.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 31

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

C. Device Location
Consider the device location and communication network layout when choosing an architecture. If
all power devices are located together in the electrical room, then we recommend you use
communication gateways, such as the Link150, to connect them with dedicated daisy chains.
However, when a limited number of devices is located close to an Automation Server, it might be to
connect them directly to that server.

TIP: Since you can combine the two architectures, choose the most convenient way to connect to
the devices.

User experience
The user experience differs between the two architectures in two ways:

• The types of graphics available to display real-time power device data

• The update rate for real-time values

Graphics for Power Devices

Architecture 1

Real-time data is collected and displayed directly by Building Operation. If there is a SmartWidget
available for a device type in Building Operation, users can use the pre-built graphics in the
SmartWidget. If there is no SmartWidget for the device, users must build their own graphics based
on their needs.

Architecture 2

Real-time data is collected by PME and then transferred to Building Operation through EWS. This
real-time data can then be displayed in the same way as in Architecture 1.

However, it is also possible to use the native PME diagrams to display the data, and then integrated
the diagrams into Building Operation through the PME Web Applications. This provides much more
detailed electrical views with more electrical information.

32 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

Here is an example of a PME diagram with real-time data:

Unlike Building Operation, PME has native support for many types of power devices. Using the
diagrams in PME provides electrical views with more detailed information, reducing commissioning
time. However, for simple power devices with only a few registers, the extended diagrams from
PME become less valuable.

NOTE: If a device type is not natively supported by PME, additional commissioning time is
needed for creating a custom device type and diagrams.

Update Rate for Real-time Values

The number of communication layers the real-time values have to go through, in each polling cycle,
differs between the two architectures. This can affect the real-time data update rate in the user
interface.

Architecture 1

In Architecture 1, Building Operation polls the devices directly. The update rate of the real-time
values in the user interface depends on the following:

• Serial communication speed

• Number of devices in the serial loop and number of registers to be requested

• Capability of the Automation Server or Enterprise Server and its load

Architecture 2

In Architecture 2, PME polls the devices directly and then transfers the data to Building Operation
through EWS. The update rate of the real-time value in user interface depends on the following:

• Update rate for EWS communication

• Serial communication speed

• Number of devices in the serial loop and numbers of registers to be requested

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 33

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Capability of the PME server

• Bandwidth allocation between real-time and log retrieving of PME

Because of the added communication layers, and the available real-time data bandwidth in PME,
the update rate for a real-time value for architecture 2 is typically slower than Architecture 1. Refer
to 5. Communications and data transfer for more information.

Conclusion

If the real-time update rate is your top priority and only a small number of registers are needed,
choose Architecture 1. Otherwise, choose Architecture 2 to make use of all the functions of your
power devices.

Commissioning time
The engineering time required for the integration varies for different architectures. See the 6.
Commissioning time section for details.

IT Considerations
The server recommendations are different for Architecture 1 and Architecture 2. See 2. Computer
hardware for more information.

34 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

5. Communications and data transfer

System communication design varies significantly between Architecture 1 and Architecture 2.

Architecture 1
Device Communications
In Architecture 1, device communications are handled by Building Operation (Enterprise Server,
Automation Server, or any other BMS field-level devices).

Refer to the Architectural Guidelines - EcoStruxure Building Management document and relevant
device documentation for more communication design information.

Logging Data in Building Operation

In Architecture 1, historical data is collected in TrendLogs. TrendLogs can be fed by any Building
Operation variables, including BACnet, LON, XML, or Modbus Point.

NOTE: When logging data in Building Operation, it is recommended to use interval trend log to log
the raw data from meters. The cumulative raw data is then inserted into the PME database by the
ETL tool. PME Dashboards and Reports have an aggregation mechanism to make use of the data.
Hourly, daily, and monthly usage does not need to be calculated in Building Operation for PME
use.

If both Trendlog and Extended Trendlog are used, it is recommended to send the data in the
Trendlog to PME (via ETL) to avoid the lagging between Extended Trendlog and Trendlog.

It is recommended to plan the variables to be logged during the design phase so that the size of the
Trendlog files can be forecast. Also, it is important to plan which Trendlogs are to be transferred to
PME in order to forecast the size and growth of the database.

ETL Jobs
An ETL job is a set of task definitions that the ETL engine follows in order to Extract, Transform, and
Load data from one data source to another. An ETL job contains an extract task to pull the data, a
transform task to manipulate the data, and a load task that applies the data to the new location.

After the job is set up, you can set the job to run as a service. When set to run as a service, a job
automatically runs at set times based on the settings you input in the Job tab. The Sleep Time
Between Execution value (in seconds) allows you to define the frequency with a default value of

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 35

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3600 seconds. The value defines when new data can be displayed in the Dashboards and Reports.
You can use a smaller value if you want the job to run more frequently. For meter interval data, 900
seconds is usually fast enough for the updates. When increasing this value, consider the Building
Operation Trendlog size to make sure it can be covered before being overwritten in order to prevent
missing TrendLogs.

ETL does not use any of the PME processes, so this has little impact on PME performance while
loading. SQL supports multi-threading and will serve both ETL and PME needs. If SQL is
overloaded, the data buffer handles it.

Architecture 2
Real-time Communication
The following flow chart shows the detail of the real-time data flow in PME when integrating with
Building Operation under Architecture 2.

EWS Communication
There are two configurable settings that control the EWS communication and that you can use to
optimize system performance: Value Poll Interval, in Building Operation, and Real-time Refresh
Rate, in PME.

36 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

Value Poll Interval

In the Building Operation EWS Interface, you can configure the Value Poll Interval, which defines
the frequency of the EWS polling, for real-time values. The default value is 20 seconds.

Real-time Refresh Rate

In the PME EWS server web.config file, in ...\Power Monitoring
Expert\applications\EWS, you can set the Real-time Refresh Rate. This setting controls how
often the PME EWS server updates the real-time data it serves up. The default Real-time Refresh
Rate setting is 30 seconds.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 37

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Default set of EWS web.config file settings in PME:

<appSettings>
<add key="ServiceInventoryEndpoint"
value="http://STANDALONE:23102/CoreServicesHost/Inventory/InventoryService" />
<add key="EWSRealTimeTimeout" value="120" />
<add key="ServiceLocation" value="EWS Services" />
<add key="DigestAuthenticationModule_Realm" value="DataExchangeService" />
<add key="AllowMD5DigestHash" value="1" />
<add key="EWSEnabled" value="1" />
<add key="ContainerItemStructure" value="0" />
<add key="NaNValue" value="" />
<add key="ConcatSourceAlarmEventId" value="1" />
<add key="RealTimeRefreshRate" value="30" />
<add key="RealTimeSessions" value="10" />
<add key="InternalStructureCacheTimeInSeconds" value="120" />
<add key="NumberOfDaysBackToInclude" value="10" />
<add key="InvalidAlarmTypes" value="ALM_CONTROL_EVENT,ALM_LOOSE_DROPOUT,ALM_
GENERIC_EVENT,ALM_CLOCK" />
</appSettings>

Communication Performance
The following shows the results of an EWS server performance test in PME:

NOTE: This test was performed on an earlier version of the PME/EBO Integration solution, called
Power Manager at that time.

Computer Type: Server

OS: Windows Server 2012 R2
SQL: 2012 Standard SP1
CPU: x2 Intel Xeon E56xx (4 core)
RAM: 24 GB
HDD: x6 300 GB
Software: Building Operation 1.6 + Power Manager 1.0

Number of Tags per Average Response

Number of Devices Total Number of tags
Device Time (s)
5 1 5 <1
5 4 20 < 1
5 10 50 1.25
500 1 500 3
500 4 2000 6

38 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

Number of Tags per Average Response

Number of Devices Total Number of tags
Device Time (s)
500 10 5000 13.5
1500 1 1500 5.75
1500 4 6000 18
2000 1 2500 6.5

NOTE: The EWS response time is independent of the measurement and device type, as long as
the number of measurements, and the number of devices they were distributed across, remains
the same.

The chart below shows a graphical representation of the EWS response time vs. Number of tags in
an EWS request:

As discussed previously, the EWS request is sent from Building Operation only when there is a
need, for example a graphic is open. Therefore, typically an EWS request from Building Operation to
PME contains less than 1000 tags. For example, if 100 devices are shown in one graphic, and each
has four bound values, then an EWS request for the 400 values (tags) is sent to the PME EWS
Server when the graphic is opened in Building Operation. In case, based on the above test results,
the EWS response time is about three seconds. This provides plenty of buffer time with a 20 second
value polling setting in Building Operation as the default.

NOTE: Consider the impact on other parts of the Building Operation system, when tuning the
polling rate to achieve faster refresh.

Alarm Communication
In Architecture 1, alarms are created in Building Operation, Automation Server or Enterprise Server.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 39

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

In Architecture 2, technically the alarms can be created in both systems, PME or Building
Operation. A proper design of the alarm generation logic and communication is important for a
successful solution.

PME Alarms
PME alarm data is transferred to Building Operation using EWS. It is important to understand the
two possible sources of an alarm in the PME system:

• On-board alarm – Generated and logged in the device (meter, circuit breaker, and so on)

• Software-based alarm – Generated by the PME software and logged in the computer cache.

On-board Alarms

For important alarms, such as circuit breaker trips, power outage, or over current, try to use the
device on-board alarms in circuit breakers or meters. Even for a less important alarms, on-board
alarms are recommended to use to gain higher system reliability and also to make use of the device
functionality.

Software based Alarms

If the device does not have on-board alarming, or additional alarms need to be created, it is
recommended to create the alarm in Software Alarms in PME, rather than create an alarm in
Building Operation based on real-time values read via EWS.

NOTE: VIP alarms are not exposed through EWS.

EWS Alarm Communication

The following flow chart shows the details of the alarm data flow in PME when integrating with
Building Operation under Architecture 2.

40 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

PME alarms are polled only if the Alarm Polling is enabled for the EWS interface in Building
Operation.

A filter can be configured to poll only the alarms that are needed.

The priority of an alarm or event can be configured in the PME system. The typical PME alarm
priority categorization is:

• High priority alarm: 193 - 255

• Med priority alarm: 128 - 192

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 41

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Low priority alarm: 64 -127

• Information: 0 - 63.

NOTE: Any alarm priority setting greater than 255, in Building Operation, will be set to 255 for
PME.

When a user acknowledges EWS alarms in Building Operation, the corresponding alarms in the
PME system are also acknowledged automatically.

Performance: Alarm Latency

With the default software settings, an on-board alarm event is expected to be seen, in Building
Operation within 90s on average. The settings can be tuned to achieve faster performance. Using
the same concept, for a software-based alarm, the latency depends on the Building Operation EWS
polling rate and the alarm polling rate defined for the alarm.

NOTE: Consider the impact on other parts of the system, such as the real-time data performance
when tuning the polling rate to achieve a faster alarm refresh rate.

Best Practice for Using EWS Alarms in Building Operation

When choosing Architecture 2, it is not recommended to create Building Operation alarms based on
real-time values read via EWS. For real-time values, EWS communication only takes place when
there is a need, for instance, a graphic is opened by the user. In contrast, if an alarm is created
based on an EWS tag, then the EWS real-time subscription for this value will be constantly active.

However, in Building Operation, the EWS alarm object is not the same as a regular alarm object. If
there are requirements for consistent alarm messages, alarm priority, and user action associations,
which EWS alarms may not meet, it is recommended to use the Building Operation Sum Alarm
function to create a new alarm on top of one or more EWS alarms. Then the newly created Building
Operation alarm can be managed consistently with other Building Operation alarms. Refer to
Building Operation online help for more information about the Sum Alarm function.

42 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

6. Commissioning time
The engineering time required for the integration varies for different architectures. Typically, it is
faster to deploy Architecture 2 than Architecture 1 for the following reasons:

• When the power devices are supported by PME, it is faster to configure the devices in
Architecture 2 than in Architecture 1, even when there are SmartWidgets available in Building
Operation. When no SmartWidgets are available, the time for creating the Modbus map in
Building Operation can be considerable.

• Configuring the ETL to setup the historical data transfer from Building Operation to PME, which
is required for Architecture 1, can add considerable deployment time.

Architecture 1
Below are commissioning time estimates for PME/EBO Integration solutions for Architecture 1:

Standard
Average
Architecture 1 Configuration Workflow Deviation
Time (min)
(min)
Installing and licensing Building Operation *
1.1 Installing and licensing License Server
1.2 Installing Enterprise Server
1.3 Installing Workstation
1 16.7 1.5
Installing Building Operation Connector
1.4
components, snippets, and binding template
Single-server install only: Changing Building
1.5
Operation ports
Installing and licensing PME *
2.1 Installing PME
2 54.7 18.4
2.2 Activating PME licenses
2.3 Single-server install only: Changing PME ports
Configure the devices in Building Operation with
SmartWidgets
3.1 Configuring Modbus Master Interface
3 3.2 Importing SmartWidgets 81.7 36.6
3.3 Modifying SmartWidgets graphic
3.4 Creating trend logs for SmartWidgets
3.5 Copy, paste and edit to have the full system
ETL
4.1 Installing ETL
4.2 Creating ETL job
4 40.3 30.3
4.3 Adding and configuring the tasks
4.4 Configuring the mapping
4.5 Run job once and then register as a service

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 43

Design EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Web Application Integration Utility Settings and

Building Operation Import
5 5.1 Configuring web applications 12.7 15
5.2 Exporting the XML
5.3 Importing the XML
Setting up Dashboards and Reports *
6 6.1 Configuring Dashboards 39.7 21.1
6.2 Configuring Reports
Setting up Graphics *
7 7.1 Setting up Electrical One Line Diagram 141.7 40.8
7.2 Setting up System Network Health screen
Total 387.3 116.9

* These steps are identical for both architectures.

Architecture 2
Below are commissioning time estimates for PME/EBO Integration solutions for Architecture 2:

Standard
Average
Architecture 2 Configuration Workflow Deviation
Time (min)
(min)
Installing and licensing Building Operation *
1.1 Installing and licensing License Server
1.2 Installing Enterprise Server
1.3 Installing Workstation
1 14.0 6.1
Installing Building Operation Connector
1.4
components, snippets, and binding template
Single-server install only: Changing Building
1.5
Operation ports
Installing and licensing PME *
2.1 Installing PME
2 41.0 8.2
2.2 Activating PME licenses
2.3 Single-server install only: Changing PME ports
Configure the devices in PME
3.1 Adding Devices in PME
3 23.0 9.0
3.2 Generating a Vista Network Diagram
3.3 Update EWS Server
Web Application Integration Utility Settings and
Building Operation Import
4 4.1 Configuring web applications 15.3 7.8
4.2 Exporting the XML
4.3 Importing the XML

44 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Design

Setting up Dashboards and Reports *

5 5.1 Configuring Dashboards 29.7 8
5.2 Configuring Reports
Setting up Graphics *
6 6.1 Setting up Electrical One Line Diagram 138.7 27.7
6.2 Setting up System Network Health screen
Total 261.7 66.8

* These steps are identical for both architectures.

Estimation Guidelines
Below are guidelines for estimating the engineering time required to set up the key components of
an PME/EBO Integration solution.

Software Installation
The installation and licensing of the solution does not vary based on the size of the system.

Device Configuration
The time required to configure the devices varies greatly based on the device types and their native
support in the system. Do not simply multiply the amount of time provided in our commissioning
time estimates by the number of devices in your system. Use the estimates only as a general
guideline for the engineering time that might be required.

ETL
Configuring the ETL to setup the historical data transfer from Building Operation to PME is an
additional task for Architecture 1, which takes a considerable amount of time. The required effort
depends on the number of devices, device types, and the number of logs and measurement types.
The use of batch editing, when configuring the Mapping in the ETL, can significantly reduce the
configuration time.

Web Application Integration Utility Settings

The time it takes to integrate PME and Building Operation by using the Web Application Integration
Utility Settings does not vary based on the size of the system. The exception being the following:

• The time it takes to export the XML will vary somewhat based on size of the system.

• The export and import in Building Operation takes slightly longer for larger systems.

Setting up Dashboards and Reports

The time for setting up Dashboards and Reports is determined by the customer needs. The
reference system used for estimation covers basic Dashboards and Reports for the power
management of a building.

Setting up Graphics
For the graphics configuration (Electrical Network Graphics) the time recorded was the time to build
them from scratch. The default Electric One Line Diagram ANSI/IEC and default Electrical Health
Summary Screen is part of the reference system package. Time can be saved by modifying the
default diagrams rather than building them from scratch.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 45

Installing EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Installing
Installing the PME/EBO Integration solution includes the following steps:

1. Downloading the PME/EBO Integration Toolkit

2. Installing EcoStruxure Building Operation

3. Installing the components, snippets, and binding template

4. Installing PME

5. Installing ETL (only for Architecture 1 solutions)

NOTE: Steps 1 - 4 are required for both solution architectures.

See the following sections for details.

46 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Installing

1. Downloading the PME/EBO Integration Toolkit

The PME/EBO Integration Toolkit is used to integrate PME into Building Operation WorkStation.

Starting with PME 2021,

• The Toolkit contains ETL only. To get the toolkit, download the PME_EBO Integration
Tools.zip file from the Exchange Extranet (see Resources for link information). Extract the
files in the zip archive to the location on the Building Operation server, where you want to run
the tools.

• The Building Operation components, snippets, and binding template are available in PME ISO
under EBO Integration Files folder. Copy this folder to the location on the Building Operation
server, where you want to run the tools.

• The Integration Utility is a Web application settings in PME. Open the Settings page from the
SETTINGS link in the Web Applications banner and navigate to Security -> Integrations->
Integration Utility.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 47

Installing EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

2. Installing Building Operation

The following describes the installation and licensing of Building Operation. Refer to the
“Installation” section in the EcoStruxure Building Operation IT Reference Guide for more
information.

To install Building Operation

1. Install License Administrator.

a. When the License Administrator installation wizard prompts, include the License
Administrator and License Server components.

b. Open License Administrator and activate the licenses.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Activate product and component licenses prior to the expiry of the trial license.
• Activate sufficient licenses for the servers and devices in your system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.

2. Install Enterprise Server.

3. Install Workstation.

Changing Building Operation port settings (for single server installation only)

If Building Operation and PME are installed on the same server, you must change the ports used by
Building Operation through the Software Administrator in order to avoid conflicts between Building
Operation and PME. The default ports of 80 and 443 are reserved for PME.

To change the Building Operation server ports:

1. Open Software Administrator.

2. Click Stop Service if the service is currently running.

3. Under Communication Ports, change the values for the server ports, for example change the
HTTP Port to 8080 and the HTTPS Port to 446.

NOTE: For the HTTP server port, do not use the value 80, and for the HTTPS server port, do
not use the value 443—these values are reserved for PME.

48 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Installing

4. Click Start Service, allow time for the service to start, and then click OK to exit.

After you changed the server port settings, you must modify the Building Operation Workstation
login.

To modify the Building Operation Workstation login:

1. Open Workstation.

2. Add ":446" (the HTTPS port defined above) to the server information. For example, if your
server name is "Standalone", make it appear as "Standalone:446".

3. Provide your user name and password credentials and click Log on.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 49

Installing EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Installing the components, snippets, and binding template

Install the components, snippets, and the binding template into Building Operation.

Components are standardized, predefined graphics that represent features in a live system. They
are located in dedicated libraries, and are displayed in the Components pane. You add components
to a graphic instead of drawing all the drawing objects yourself to simplify the graphics creation
process.

Snippets are standardized, predefined functions that typically represent a feature in a live system.
They are located in dedicated libraries, and are displayed in the Snippets pane.

The binding template is used to automatically bind EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS)
measurements or SmartWidget values to corresponding measurements in Building Operation
graphics library objects. Using the binding template, you create bindings between the Automation
Server program variables, internal values, and I/O points.

NOTE: Before you install these tools, close the Building Operation Graphics Editor.

Installing Components and Snippets

1. In File Explorer, navigate to where you copied the EBO Integration Files folder from the PME
ISO.

2. Navigate to the EBO Integration Files > Graphics Editor > Components folder.

3. Double-click each file in the Components folder. The components (ANSI Symbols, Generic
Components, IEC Symbols, and Meter Graphics) are installed in the Graphics Editor and
appear in the Components pane at the left.

4. Navigate to the EBO Integration Files > Graphics Editor > Snippets folder.

5. Double-click the file in the Snippets folder. The snippets are installed and appear in the
Snippets pane at the left.

Importing the Binding Template

1. Log on to WorkStation.

2. In the System Tree, expand Server > System.

3. Right-click Binding Templates and select Import from the list. The Open dialog appears.

4. Navigate to EBO Integration Files > WorkStation and select Power Manager - Binding
Template.xml.

5. Click Open. The Import dialog appears.

6. Click Import.

7. Click Close when the import is complete.

50 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Installing

4. Installing PME
The following describes the installation and licensing of PME.

NOTE:
If possible, log on to your Windows system using the built-in local Administrator account for
installing PME. If that is not possible, use an account that is a member of the Administrators
group. Permissions for the Administrators group can be restricted by system policies which might
affect the PME installation. The built-in Administrator account does not have such limitations.

Starting with Microsoft Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016, the Administrator account cannot
be used for software installation. For these operating systems use an account that is a member of
the Administrators group

Installing the PME software

To install the PME software:

1. Insert the PME DVD or mount the PME ISO. Double-click MainSetup.exe to begin the
installation. The installation dialog appears.

2. Select a language from the drop down list, and click Next. Follow the install pages and
instructions until you get to the Setup Type page.

3. For Setup Type, select Standalone Server. The other Setup Types are not supported for the
PME/EBO Integration solution. Click Next.

4. Follow the install pages and instructions, using the default settings where possible, until you
get to the Supervisor Account page.

5. For the Supervisor Account, set a strong password for the supervisor user. Click Next.

6. Follow the install pages and instructions, using the default settings where possible, until you
have completed the installation.

7. Click Close when the installation is complete.

For more details on installing PME, see the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide.

Activating the licenses for PME

The PME software that is part of the PME/EBO Integration solution, includes a 90-day Trial license
for all features. You must activate valid, purchased licenses for within 90 days, or some software
functionality is disabled.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Activate product and component licenses prior to the expiry of the trial license.
• Activate sufficient licenses for the servers and devices in your system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 51

Installing EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To activate a license online:

NOTE: Licenses can also be activated using offline method. For offline activation steps, see the
EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide.

1. On the PME server, open the License Configuration Tool, and click Activate License.

A message box is displayed.

NOTE: You can access the License Configuration in the install location within
....\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring Expert\License
Configuration Tool.

2. Read the information and click OK.

The Activate License page opens.

3. On the Activate License page, enter the Activation ID, and then click Activate.

NOTE: By default, the activation method is set to Online.

The license appear in the License Configuration Tool.

4. Close the License Configuration Tool.

5. Open the PME Management Console and login with the supervisor account to confirm that the
license is working.

6. Click Help > About to display information about your licenses.

NOTE: Device licenses are required for all the devices connected to PME under Architecture
2. The Trial license for PME includes unlimited device license for the first 90 days.

For further instructions on the purchase and activation of licenses, see the EcoStruxure™ Power
Monitoring Expert System Guide.

52 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Installing

5. Installing ETL (only for Architecture 1 solutions)

The ETL is only used with Architecture 1, where it copies historical data from Building Operation to
PME. The ETL installer is included in the PME/EBO Integration Toolkit.

NOTE: On Windows Operating Systems with restricted permissions, the ETL tool might not
initialize and load its plugins on start up. This is due to limited write permission on the ETL default
install folder (...\Program Files\...). A possible solution is to install ETL to a custom folder
with write permission (for example, C:\ETL).

To install the ETL

1. In File Explorer, navigate to where you extracted the PME/EBO Integration Toolkit.

2. Navigate to PME_EBO Integration Tools, and run the ETL.exe to open the installer.

3. Follow the install pages and instructions, using the default settings where possible, until you
have completed the installation.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 53

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Configuring
Configuring the PME/EBO Integration solution includes the following steps:

1. Configuring server settings

2. Configuring communications

3. Configuring PME Web Applications

4. Integrating PME Web applications in Building Operation

5. Setting up Graphics in Building Operation

6. Configuring Dashboards and Slideshows

NOTE: These steps are required for both solution architectures, unless specifically called out in
the workflow steps.

See the following sections for details.

54 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

1. Configuring server settings

PME server
Install a security certificate for TLS 1.2
PME uses Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.2 for an encrypted, authenticated connection using
HTTPS between the server and the Web clients.

A security certificate must be installed on the PME server and must be bound to the Default Web
Site, which is used by PME. By default, if no bound certificate is detected, PME is installed with a
self-signed certificate.

RECOMMENDATION: We strongly recommend that you replace the self-signed certificate with
an authority issued certificate.

Set SQL Server memory options

Set the SQL Server memory options to optimize system performance.

NOTE: Setting the SQL Server memory options applies only to full, standard editions of SQL
Server. It does not apply to SQL Server Express editions.

See Setting SQL Server memory options for details.

See the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide for additional recommended post-
installation configuration steps.

Building Operation server

Add PME server as Trusted site in Internet Options
Building Operation and PME can be installed on the same server (operating system) or on two
separate servers.

When installing on separate servers, you must configure Internet Explorer on the Building Operation
computer to add the PME server URL as a Trusted site.

To add the PME server URL as a Trusted site:

1. Open Internet Explorer and navigate to Tools > Internet Options, then click Security.

2. Select Local intranet, and then click Sites. The Local intranet dialog appears.

3. (For IE 11) In Local intranet, click Advanced.

4. In the Add this website to the zone field, enter your PME server site address, and then click
Add. Your PME server site is now added as a Local intranet site zone.

5. Click OK. Your system can now authenticate your Power Monitoring Expert server.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 55

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

2. Configuring Communications
The configuration of the software and device communications is dependent on the solution
architecture. The following describes the configuration required for Architecture 1 and 2.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Architecture 1
Configuring communications for Architecture 1 includes the following steps:

1. Adding devices to Building Operation

2. Configuring EWS settings in Building Operation

3. Configuring the ETL

See the following sections for details.

Adding devices to Building Operation

Add the power devices to Building Operation. For information on how to add devices to Building
Operation, see the EcoStruxure Building Operation Technical Reference Guide.

Configuring EWS settings in Building Operation

In Building Operation Workstation, navigate to <Your server name>\System\EcoStruxure
Web Services and check to see that the EWS Server settings match the following:

56 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Confirm that:

• Enable EWS Server is set to "True"

• Ensure secure communication is set to “Disabled”

• Server Value is set to “True.”

We recommended you setup a dedicated ETLUser account for EWS in Building Operation.

To create an account:

1. Navigate to <Your Server name>\System\Domains\Local\Users\ and click New >

User Account.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 57

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

2. Make sure ETLUser is a member of “Administrators” account group:

Configuring the ETL

The ETL tool connects to the Building Operation EWS server, reads out the required historical data
(Trend logs), and inserts that data into the PME database. Within the ETL, the task descriptions
required to complete the data copy process are organized into Jobs.

An ETL Job contains the following:

• An Extract task to read out the data from a server (in this case, Building Operation)

• (Optional) A Transform task to edit the data

• A Load task to write the data to the new location (in this case, the PME database).

TIP: When creating a new job in ETL, you can clone an existing job, rather than making a job from
scratch. To clone a job, select an existing job from the Job Management drop down and click Edit.
In the Job tab, change the name to reflect the new job. Click the Task tab and edit the new job as
necessary. Click Apply or OK from any tab location to save the job with the new name.

The following sections describe how to configure an ETL Job for the PME/EBO Integration solution,
Architecture 1 implementation.

Prerequisites
Before configuring the ETL, confirm that:

• Building Operation is installed and configured.

• Trend logs and Extended Trend logs are setup and ready to use in Building Operation. For
information regarding Trend logs, refer to the "Trend log" section in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation System Reference Guide

• PME is installed and configured

• The EWS server in Building Operation is functioning correctly.

• ETL is installed correctly

58 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Creating an ETL job

To create an ETL job:

1. On your desktop, double-click the shortcut EcoStruxure ETL (Building Operation to PME) -
ETL Administration Tool. The ETL Engine Job Configuration Tool dialog appears.

2. Click New. The Job tab appears.

3. Enter the name of the job in the Name field. If you are running the job as a service, review and
change the Sleep Time Between Execution value, if necessary. This value determines the
length of time between jobs when a job is run as a service. The default value is 3600 seconds.

4. Click the Tasks tab. The Tasks pane appears.

TIP: See ETL tips and tricks for information such as batch edits, sorting and searching data grids,
running a job manually or as a service, editing job tasks.

Adding and configuring the Extract task

To add and configure the Extract task:

1. From the Select Category drop-down, select Extract.

2. From the Select Type drop-down, select EBO EWS Extract Task, and then click Add. The
EBO EWS Extract Task appears in the pane below.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 59

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Select the task to show the task settings in the right pane.

4. Complete all fields as necessary for the task. Complete at least the following fields:
Web Service User Name – The Building Operation EWS user name (for example: admin)

Web Service Password – The Building Operation EWS password

Web Service URL – Replace localhost:8080 with your <server name>:<http port
number>

NOTE: The ETL does not support secure HTTP (HTTPS) URLs. Do not use HTTPS URLs with
the Building Operation EWS server.

NOTE: The ETL does not support the SHA-256 Cryptographic Hash Algorithm for authentication.
You must enable the MD5 Cryptographic Hash Algorithm for authentication in Building Operation
for the PME/EBO Integration solution. The option can be found in WorkStation Control Panel >
Security Settings > Disable MD5 Hash.

To test your EWS connection, click the Web Service URL row to display an ellipsis button. Click
the ellipsis button. Enter your Web Service URL and then click Test.

Refer to Extract task: Setting parameters and recommended values in the Reference section to see
a complete list of parameters and recommended values for each setting.

(Optional) Adding and configuring the Transform task

A Transform task is not required for the PME/EBO Integration solution. However, it is possible to
improve the data quality for the display in PME Dashboards and Reports by correcting irregular
timestamps for interval logged data. The IntervalizeDataTransformTask task in the ETL can be
used for this purpose. It is designed to adjust the log timestamps to a pre-defined interval.

60 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Below is an example of a 15-minute interval data log with irregular timestamps, before and after the
transform:

Before Transforming After Transforming (15 min. interval)

Value Timestamp Value Timestamp
1.23 23:58:12 1.23 00:00:00
2.34 00:07:11 n/a n/a
3.45 00:13:13 3.45 00:15:00
4.56 00:31:14 3.45 00:30:00
5.67 00:43:17 5.67 00:45:00

NOTE: The transform only corrects the timestamps, not the logged data values for the intervals.
This can introduce inaccuracies in the logged data.

DO NOT use this transform task,

• for Change of Value (COV) data logs

• when timestamp consistency between the data in Building Operation and PME is important

To add and configure the Intervalize Data Transform task:

1. From the Select Category drop-down, select Transform.

2. from the Select Type drop-down, select IntervalizeDataTransformTask and then click Add.
The Intervalize Transform Task appears in the pane below.

3. Select the task to show the task settings in the right pane.

4. Complete all fields as necessary for the task. Complete at least the following field:
Target Reading Interval – Set this value to your Trend log logging interval (default is
fifteen minutes).

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 61

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Refer to Transform task: Setting parameters and recommended values in the Reference section to
see a complete list of parameters and recommended values for each setting.

Adding and configuring the Load task

To add and configure the Load task:

1. From the Select Category drop down, select Load.

2. Select Power Monitoring Expert Load Task from the Select Type drop-down menu, and then
click Add. The Power Monitoring Expert Load Task appears in the pane below.

3. Select the task to show the task settings in the right pane.

4. Complete all fields as necessary for the task. Complete at least the following fields:
Database Settings – Make sure all 3 database settings are correct.

Enable Recorder and Channel Creation – Set this value to True.

NOTE: If you plan to use the Energy Cost Report or Load Profile Report, review the Enable
Recorder and Channel Creation setting in Load task: Setting parameters and
recommended values.

5. After you finish configuring all necessary tasks, click Apply to save your changes without
exiting the job, or click OK to save and exit the job.

Refer to Load task: Setting parameters and recommended values in the Reference section to see a
complete list of parameters and recommended values for each setting.

Mapping Building Operation tags to PME measurements

Building Operation is a tag-based system, while PME is a Device/Measurement-based system.
Therefore, you must use the Mappings tab to manually map the tags to the corresponding
Device/Measurements.

TIP: See ETL tips and tricks for information such as batch edits, sorting and searching data grids,
running a job manually or as a service, editing job tasks.

62 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

To map tags to measurements:

1. In the ETL tool, select the job you created for the PME/EBO Integration solution.

2. Click the Mappings tab. The Mappings dialog appears.

3. Click Load Sources. Trend logs from Building Operation load and appear in the Mappings
pane.

Depending on the size and the design of your system, the Trend logs may take some time (up
to 30 minutes) to load.

After you click Load Sources, the Client status details appear at the lower left of the dialog and
show the number of tags loaded and folders searched.

4. Once loaded, identify the rows containing the Trend logs that you want to import into PME.

5. For each row, do the following:

Complete the Target Device field by selecting an existing device from the drop-down list,
or by entering a new name for a device.

NOTE:
If you create a new device, your new device name must match the PME naming
convention. The following limitations apply:
Names cannot contain spaces or the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > { } . , ' & @ |
%#

Do not use names such as CON, AUX, COM1, and LPT1 when naming sites and
devices.

Complete the Target Measurement field by selecting an existing measurement from the
drop-down list.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 63

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Refer to Measurement mapping for ETL in the Reference section to learn about the most
common, supported measurements used in PME and how to link to typical Building
Management tags.

Select the Time Zone from the dropdown list.

Change the value for the scale, if necessary.

Select the checkbox in the Included column at the left to include the Trend log in this job.

6. After you have mapped all desired Trend logs, click Apply to save the job.

Troubleshooting missing Trend logs

All Building Operation Trend logs should appear in the Trend log list. If Trend logs do not appear,
check the following:

• Missing bindings: Values that have not been bound to the graphics.

• Trend log status is not Started: If the Trend log status is not “Started” in Building Operation
through the EWS server, the Trend logs will not be exposed in the ETL tool, and therefore, those
Trend logs will not be returned or displayed in the ETL tool. All Trend logs should be exposed in
the ETL tool and appear in the Mappings tab when you click Load Sources. Before you run an
ETL job, in Building Operation, check to make sure that the Trend log status is set to “Started”;

• Meters/servers offline: The Trend logs are connected to devices or servers that are offline.

• Extended Trend log link not broken: Trend logs that are being monitored by Extended Trend logs
where the connection is not broken.

Architecture 2
Configuring communications for Architecture 2 includes the following steps:

1. Adding devices to PME

2. Updating the PME EWS server

See the following sections for details.

64 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Adding devices to PME

NOTE: Device licenses are required for all devices connected to PME. The PME trial license, that
is part of the PME/EBO Integration solution, includes an unlimited device license for the first 90
days. You must activate valid purchased licenses within 90 days, otherwise some software
functionality is disabled.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Activate product and component licenses prior to the expiry of the trial license.
• Activate sufficient licenses for the servers and devices in your system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.

Use Management Console in PME to add, remove or configure system components, such as
Ethernet or serial metering devices, in your system.

NOTE: Run Management Console as Administrator user. To do this, right-click the Management
Console program icon and select Run as administrator from the context menu. If you do not run
it as Administrator, then certain tools such as Update EWS Server are not functional.

NOTE: Access to this application or function is controlled by user privileges. See Default User
Access Level Privileges in Web Applications help, and Customizing Access Level Privileges
in User Manager help for details.

NOTICE
NETWORK INOPERABILITY
Do not make unauthorized changes in the network configuration.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in an unstable or unusable network.

See the following sections for details on how to add devices.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 65

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Setting up your network in Management Console

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTICE
NETWORK INOPERABILITY
Do not make unauthorized changes in the network configuration.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in an unstable or unusable network.

The Primary Server contains all the Power Monitoring Expert programs and it controls the overall
operation of your energy management system. The primary server is displayed on the Server screen
when you first start Management Console.

To start building your system, add and configure your sites and devices.

Overview

Site and Device Naming restrictions

The following applies to Site, Device Group, and Device Name naming:

66 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

• Names cannot contain spaces or the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > { } . , ' & @ | % #

• The maximum length for a Group.Device name is 99 characters (+ 1 for the period
separation).

• Do not use names such as CON, AUX, COM1, and LPT1 for sites and devices.

• All characters must exist in the system's Windows code pages. For example. on an English
Windows operating system, certain non-English language characters are not supported.

Adding network components

For details on adding various components, see the following sections.

Follow the procedure below to add a new network component:

1. In the System Setup pane, select the icon for the type of item that you want to add ( Site,
Device, or Dial Out Modem).

2. Right-click the display window, select New, and then select the specific type of network
component from the shortcut menu to open the Configuration dialog.

The options differ depending on which system setup icon you selected.

3. Use the fields and drop-down menus to configure properties. Mandatory items are highlighted
in red. To configure advanced properties, right-click the dialog and select Advanced
Properties. For more shortcut menu options, see Configuration Dialog shortcut menus,
below.

4. Click OK to add the component.

Configuration Dialog shortcut menus

Right-click the Configuration dialog to access the following shortcut menu options:

• Property Details: This opens a window that contains information on the selected property,
including minimum and maximum allowable values, if applicable.

• Advanced Properties: This exposes all the property fields that are hidden in the default (basic)
view. For further information about the Time synchronization option. see Time synchronization
for ION meters for further information.

• Reset All To Default: Resets all properties to their original values.

Adding a server

Click the Servers icon, right-click the display window and select New > Computer. Fill in the
mandatory Name field.

Adding devices

Setting Up devices for direct serial communications

To set up devices for RS-232 or RS-485 communications on a direct serial loop, first add a direct
site in Management Console and specify a serial communications port on the computer.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 67

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Step1: Adding a direct site

Click the Sites icon. Right-click the display window and select New > Direct Site. Fill in the Name
and Serial Port fields. Configure the other fields as you require.

Step 2: Adding a device to the direct site

Click the Devices icon. Right-click the display window and select New > Serial Device on Direct
Site. Fill in these fields:

• Group: Type a name for the group or select an existing group from the list.

• Name: Type the name you want to give the device.

• Device Type: Select the type of the device.

• Unit ID: Type the Unit ID of the device; the range is 1-9999 for ION devices or 1-247 for
Modbus RTU devices.

• Site: Select the direct site you previously set up.

• Time Zone: Select the timezone you want the device data to be displayed in, in the software.
This setting is only used for the display of timestamped data in the software. It does not affect
the configuration of the monitoring device itself.

Configure the other fields as you require.

Setting up devices for Ethernet gateway communications

To set up devices for Ethernet gateway communications, first add and configure an Ethernet
gateway site. Ethernet gateways that can be used include those that are simple Ethernet-to-Serial
converters, or any gateway or data concentrator that provides ModbusTCP communications.

Step 1: Adding an Ethernet gateway site

Click the Sites icon. Right-click the display window and select New > Ethernet Gateway Site.

Complete the Name, IP Address or Host Name and TCP/IP Port fields. (The IP address can be
IPv4 or IPv6.) The TCP/IP Port identifies which communications port is used to connect to the
serial devices. The port you use depends on the type of Ethernet gateway you want to set up (use
7801 for an EtherGate gateway via COM1 or use port 502 for a Modbus gateway).

Configure the other fields as you require.

Step 2: Adding a Device to the Ethernet Gateway Site

Click the Devices icon. Right-click the display window and select New > Serial Device on
Ethernet Gateway Site. Fill in these fields:

• Group: Type a name for the group or select an existing group from the list.

• Name: Type the name you want to give the device.

• Device Type: Select the type of device.

• Unit ID: Type the Unit ID of the device; the range is 1-9999 for ION devices or 1-247 for
Modbus devices.

• Site: Select the Ethernet gateway site you previously set up.

68 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

• Time Zone: Select the timezone you want the device data to be displayed in, in the software.
This setting is only used for the display of timestamped data in the software. It does not affect
the configuration of the monitoring device itself.

Configure the other fields as you require.

Adding an Ethernet device

Ethernet devices are configured in PME by providing fixed IP addresses (IPv4 or IPv6) and ports, or
based on device names. Device names must be used for devices with dynamic address
assignment, for example using the DHCP protocol. When device names are used, then a form of
name resolution mechanism is required on the network.
To add an Ethernet device, click the Devices icon. Right-click the display window and select
New > Ethernet Device. Fill in the Group, Name, Device Type, IP Address or Host Name, and
Time Zone fields. (The IP address can be IPv4 or IPv6.) Configure the other fields as you require.

NOTE: For the Time Zone field, select the timezone you want the device data to be displayed in,
in the software. This setting is only used for the display of timestamped data in the software. It
does not affect the configuration of the monitoring device itself.

Setting up devices for OPC communications

To set up devices for OPC communications, first add an OPC site.

Step 1: Adding an OPC site

Click the Sites icon. Right-click the display window and select New > OPC Site. Fill in the Name
and Address fields. Configure the other fields as you require.

Make sure you follow the correct syntax when typing in the address for the OPC site. Select the
Address field to see an example address in the Property Description section (near the bottom of the
OPC Site Configuration dialog).

Step 2: Adding a device to the OPC site

NOTE: At least one OPC Device Type needs to be preconfigured before an OPC Device can be
created in Management Console. Contact Technical Support for assistance.

Click the Devices icon. Right-click the display window and select New > OPC Device. Fill in the
Group, Name, Device Type, Site (select the OPC site you previously set up), and Time Zone.
Configure the other fields as you require.

NOTE: For the Time Zone field, select the timezone you want the device data to be displayed in,
in the software. This setting is only used for the display of timestamped data in the software. It
does not affect the configuration of the monitoring device itself.

Adding a modem

1. Click the Dial Out Modems icon, right-click the display window and select New, then select
either Serial Modem (hardware modem) or WinModem (Windows modem).

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 69

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

2. Fill in the values for the mandatory fields:

For Serial modem, select the Modem Type from the list. If your modem is not in this list,
select “Generic ION Modem - Other”. Select the Serial Port where your modem is
connected.

For WinModems, select the Modem Name from the list.

Configure the other fields as you require.

3. Click OK.

WinModem installation notes

Before you can use a WinModem, you must first install it on your computer (follow the instructions
that came with the WinModem product). After you restart the computer, set up the WinModem:

1. In Microsoft Windows, click Start > Settings > Control Panel, then double-click Phone and
Modem Options.

2. Click the Modems tab, select your WinModem, then click Properties.

3. Click the Advanced tab, then click Change Default Preference.

4. Set Port speed to match the baud rate that is used between the meter and the modem on the
remote end of the connection (both modems must be set to the same baud rate).

5. Set Flow Control to “None”.

6. Click OK to save your changes.

NOTE: You may need to restart your computer for the settings to take effect.

Editing a network component

1. Click the icon in the System Setup pane for the type of component you want to edit.

2. In the display window, right-click the network component you want to edit and select
Configure <Network Component> (with <Network Component> being the type of
component you want to edit).

You can rename devices or groups displayed in the Devices pane without selecting the
Configure option. See Power Monitoring Expert – System Guide for more information.

NOTE: If you rename a group or device, the data that is already stored in the database is
associated with the new group or device name. New data will be added to the database using
the new name.

3. Make the required changes. To display all configurable fields, right-click the Configuration
dialog and select Advanced Properties.

4. Click OK when you are finished to save your changes.

70 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Deleting a network component

1. Click the System Setup icon for the type of component you want to delete.

2. In the display window, right-click the network component you want to delete and select Delete
(or select the item and press the DELETE key).

3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel.

NOTE: When you delete a Site or a Server, all devices associated with it are also deleted.

Updating the EWS Server

After adding the devices or making any changes to the device configuration in the PME, you must
update the EWS server through the Update EWS Server tool in the Management Console.

NOTE: Run Management Console as Administrator user. To do this, right-click the Management
Console program icon and select Run as administrator from the context menu. If you do not run
it as Administrator, then certain tools such as Update EWS Server are not functional.

To update EWS Server:

1. Open Management Console.

2. Select Tools > System > Update EWS Server. A dialog box appears indicating that the
update to the EWS server configuration was successful.

3. Click OK when the Update EWS Server confirmation dialog appears.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 71

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Configuring PME Web Applications

Configuring the PME Web applications may include the following settings and tools:

• Personal Preferences

• Report Theme

• System Language

• System Theme

• Diagnostics and Usage

• Registration

• Diagrams Control Options

• Login Options

• Session Timeout

• Authorized Hosts

• Billing Rates

• Device Manager

• Hierarchies

• Modeling

• System Log

• User Manager

See Web Applications settings for details.

72 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

4. Integrating PME Web applications in Building Operation

Integrating PME Web applications in Building Operation includes the following steps:

• Configuring Dashboard, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, Reports, and EWS measurements and
generate the import file with the web application Integration Utility settings.

• Importing the configuration file into Building Operation

• Setting up EWS credentials in PME (server) and Building Operation (client)

• Enabling embedded content in PME and Building Operation

See the following sections for details.

Prerequisites
Before using the PME/EBO Integration Utility, complete the following tasks:

• Install and configure PME.

• Install and configure Building Operation.

• (Only for Architecture 2 solutions) Add devices to PME.

• (Only for Architecture 2 solutions) Update the EWS Server.

• (Optional) Configure PME and Building Operation to use Windows Active Directory users and
user groups.

• (Optional) Install and configure an authority issued security certificate on the PME server.

Configuring web applications and generating the configuration import file for
Building Operation
You use the PME Web application Integration Utility settings, on the PME server, to configure
Dashboard, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, Reports, and EWS measurements for integration into
Building Operation. As a result of the configuration, the utility creates a configuration file, that is then
imported into Building Operation.

NOTE: The Integration Utility is a Web application settings in PME. You need to configure using
this utility on the PME computer. If Building Operation and PME are installed on separate
computers, then configure in the PME computer and extract its contents. See 1. Downloading the
PME/EBO Integration Toolkit for more information.

To configure Dashboard, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, Reports, and EWS measurements and to
generate import file:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 73

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

1. Open Web Applications from the EcoStruxure Power Monitoring Expert folder on your
desktop, the Schneider Electric folder on the Start Screen, or by entering the PME server URL
into your browser Address bar, e.g. http://srv1.MyCompany.com/Web

2. Login with a supervisor-level account.

3. Navigate to Settings > Security > Integrations > Integration Utility.

4. Under Authentication Method, select the desired user type for authentication:

RECOMMENDATION: Use Windows User Authentication whenever possible.

NOTICE
UNAUTHORIZED OR UNINTENDED ACCESS TO CUSTOMER DATA
• Personnel setting up the PME/EBO Integration third-party authentication must be aware
that links to data are not secure.
• Do not setup access links to sensitive or secure data.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unauthorized or unintended access
to sensitive or secure customer data.

Select Windows User.

NOTE: Links for Windows users contain no user information. Windows users accessing
the link must have permission to access the PME system and be authenticated with
Windows. One-click login must be enabled to use the Windows user authenticated links.
See Login Options for information for enabling one-click login.

To use Windows User Authentication:

Configure Building Operation and PME to use Windows Active Directory users and
user groups.

74 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Add the Windows account that is used for Windows Authentication to PME as a
Windows user with Operator access level or higher.

Enable One-Click Login in PME. See Login Options for details.

For information on setting up user authentication with Windows Active Directory in PME,
see Adding a Windows user and Adding a Windows group.

For information on Building Operation and Active Directory, see Setting Up User
Authentication with Windows Active Directory in Building Operation.

Select Standard User, select the desired PMEUser Name and enter the Password.

NOTE: Links for standard users embed the user's account information. Take care on
usage of these links. Links cannot be generated for standard users with supervisor
access level.

Links generated for standard users are pre-authenticated based on the access level of the
selected users. If you want to disable the pre-authentication, then Under Pre-
Authentication for Standard Users, turn Enable pre-authentication to off.

5. Under Generate Links For, select from the following web applications for which you want to
generate link:

Dashboards

Diagrams (only for Architecture 2 solutions)

Trends

Alarms

Reports

EWS Measurements (only for Architecture 2 solutions)

6. Under Link Format, select XML.

NOTE: (Optional) Select HTML to generate an HTML page of links. Use this option to verify
the links. The download HTML link must be opened in a different browser to test the links.

7. Click Generate Web Application Links.

The configuration import file in .xml format is downloaded to the default download location of
the browser.

Importing the configuration file into Building Operation

The configuration file, that was created in the previous step, needs to be imported into Building
Operation. To prepare for the import, copy the file to a location that is accessible from the Building
Operation server.

To import the configuration file into Building Operation:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 75

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

1. Open Building Operation and log into WorkStation.

2. Right-click the Enterprise server (the highest level in the System Tree) and select Import....

3. Navigate to and select the configuration file.

4. Click Import. The file import process completes. A new folder called “PME/EBO Integration”
appears in the System Tree.

NOTE: You can use the web application Integration Utility settings more than once. However,
importing the configuration file multiple times without deleting the previously imported folder will
create a duplicate entry in the target Building Operation system.

Setting up EWS credentials in PME (server) and Building Operation (client)

EWS credentials must be set for both the PME EWS server and the Building Operation EWS client.
To set the credentials for the PME EWS server:

1. Open PME Web Applications and select SETTINGS > Integrations > EWS Login.

NOTE: EWS must be enabled in PME for this setting to be visible.

TIP: Access Web Applications through the Web Applications shortcut in the Power
Monitoring Expert desktop folder on the PME server. Or, to go directly to the
EWS configuration page, open the following URL: https://<server_
name>/Web/#Settings/Ews

2. Click Change Credentials or Set Credentials, if this is the first time the account is
configured and enter a User name and Password.

76 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices for password creation and management.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access - such as least privilege,
separation of duties - vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to
ensure that user access adheres to the site-specific cybersecurity policies.

3. Click Save.

To set the credentials for the Building Operation EWS client:

1. In WorkStation, open the PME/EBO Integration folder.

2. Right-click the EWS Client and click Properties.

3. Enter the user name and password in the Authentication field.

4. Click OK.

Enabling embedded content in PME and Building Operation

PME does not allow other applications to embed its Web Applications content by default. Building
Operation does not allow external web content from another application to be embedded in its UI by
default. For the PME/EBO integration, both of these must be enabled.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 77

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To allow Building Operation to receive and embed web content from PME:

1. Log into Building Operation Workstation and select Tools > Control Panel > Security and
Communication > Security Settings.

2. In Security Settings, under WebStation, select Enable external content to be embedded in

WebStation.

To allow PME Web Applications to be embedded in Building Operation:

1. Open PME Web Applications and select SETTINGS > Security > Authorized Hosts.

2. Add the Building Operation server URL to the Hosts That Can Frame list.
Below is an example for a Building Operation server host URL of
https://localhost:446

78 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

3. Click Save.

4. Reset Internet Information Services (IIS) on the PME server.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 79

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

5. Setting up Graphics in Building Operation

Building Operation Components and Snippets
The EBO integration files folder in PME ISO includes components and snippets for the creation of
Graphics in Building Operation.

NOTE: These components and snippets were installed on the Building Operation server in a
previous step. See 3. Installing the components, snippets, and binding template for details.

Components
Animated Components for ANSI and IEC
The EBO integration files folder in PME ISO includes a set of animated Components that are
based on the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) symbol standards. These can be used by the Building Operation Graphics
Editor.

Static device images

The EBO integration files folder in PME ISO  includes a library of device images that can be used
in the Building Operation Graphics Editor. Use the images represent the devices and equipment
present in your system. They can be added to a diagram by selecting the device from the Meter
Graphics category and dragging the image to the work area.

The library contains images for the following devices:

• ION6200 • PM5000 Series

• ION7550/7650 • EM3500 Series
• PM700 Series • Acti 9 iEM 3000 Series
• PM800 Series • Veris E50 Series
• PM3200 Series

NOTE: Device images are available for: a). meters that are bound and show data, and b). meters
that are not bound and show no data. Choose the device images that best represent your system.

Snippets
The EBO integration files folder in PME ISO includes a Building Operation snippet that is
designed to be used with the ANSI and IEC components.

Advanced Tooltip Snippet

The Advanced Tooltip Snippet provides information regarding a specific device when the pointer
hovers over it. The display text of the tool tip can be customized, and the following properties can be
defined:

• Font size

• Font color

• Number of decimal places to display

• Measurements to show

80 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Setting up Electrical Network Graphics

Use the Building Operation Graphics Editor to create Graphics that represents an electrical network.
For example, a one-line Graphic, that includes all of the metering devices and circuits, or an
Electrical Health Summary Graphic that shows the loading of the metered circuits in the system.
Example of a one-line Graphic, created with the Building Operation Graphics Editor:

Example of an Electrical Health Summary graphic, created with the Building Operation Graphics
Editor:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 81

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Basic instructions for setting up Electrical Network Graphics

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To set up an Electrical Network Graphic:

1. Open the Building Operation Graphics Editor.

2. Create an electrical network diagram by dragging and dropping graphics onto your new file
from the imported graphics libraries (meter graphics, symbols, controls, and so on) in the left
pane.

3. For the components that you drag and drop into the graphic, select the component, and then
modify the component Name, in the General section of the Properties pane. The Name must
match the PME “GroupName.DeviceName” or the SmartWidget Name of the device for which
you want to display data.

NOTE: This Name is used by the binding template for measurement binding. See Binding
Graphics to measurements for details.

For more details on how to use the Graphics Editor, see the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Technical Reference Guide and the Building Operation Graphics Editor Web help.

82 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Binding Graphics to measurements

The EBO integration files folder in PME ISO includes a binding template to automate the binding
of Building Operation graphics components to device measurements.

When you create the EWS interface in Building Operation Workstation, a connection is made
between Building Operation and PME. The PME/EBO Integration folder in Building Operation
Workstation then contains all the device names and measurements from PME. Any graphics
components that have the correct PME device name set up will be bound to their device counterpart
when the binding template is applied. Since the binding template also contains the Modbus Point
name often used in SmartWidgets, it can also be used to bind graphics to values from the
SmartWidgets.

NOTE: This binding template was installed on the Building Operation server in a previous step.
See 3. Installing the components, snippets, and binding template for details.

Prerequisites
Before applying the binding template, confirm the following:

• The EWS interface has been established

• The components in the Building Operation Graphics Editor diagram have been correctly
configured

• The binding template has been imported into Building Operation Workstation

Applying the binding template

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To apply the binding template:

1. In Building Operation Workstation, in the System Tree pane, right-click the graphic item for
which you want to use the binding template.

2. Select Edit Bindings from the list. The Binding point list appears in the work area.

3. Drag and drop the PME/EBO Integration folder or the folder that contains the SmartWidgets to
the PME- Basic binding template. The Confirm Binding dialog appears.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 83

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

4. Confirm that the binding and binding points are correct.

5. Click File > Save when finished.

NOTE: The PME/EBO Integration binding template can only be used for an English version of the
PME/EBO Integration solution. For non-English systems, you need to manually bind the EWS
values or create a custom binding template.

84 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

6. Configuring Dashboards and Slideshows

Use the Dashboards application to view high level historical and real-time data, for example Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs). The information in the Dashboards application is accessed through
dashboards with gadgets. Dashboards are saved in the Dashboard Library. In addition to viewing
individual dashboards, you can create slideshows to automatically display a sequence of
dashboards.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Power Monitoring Expert (PME) does not provide any pre-configured dashboards or slideshows.
Configure your own dashboards, gadgets, and slideshows to meet your needs.

Open the Dashboards application from the Dashboards link in the Web Applications banner.
For information on how to configure the Dashboards application, see:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For more information on this feature, see the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert 2021 System
Guide.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 85

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Adding a new dashboard

Add new dashboards to view high level historical and real-time data, for example in the form of Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs).
To add a completely new dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the folder where you want to
create the dashboard.

2. (Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the library.

3. In the Dashboard Library, at the bottom of the panel, click Add Dashboard . This creates
a new dashboard and opens the Dashboard Settings.

4. In Dashboard Settings, enter a dashboard name, select a location and set the access
permissions to Public or Private.

NOTE: A public item is visible to all users in your user group. A private item is visible to you
and any user in your user group with Edit permissions on this item type. See Default User
Access Level Privileges and Customizing Access Level Privileges in User Manager help
for details.

5. (Optional) Click Styling to open the Dashboard Styling window. In Dashboard Styling, select
a background image or background color for the dashboard and set the default opacity for the
gadgets.

6. (Optional) You can add gadgets to the dashboard now or save the empty dashboard and add
gadgets later. See Adding a gadget to a dashboard for more details.

7. Save the dashboard.

To add a copy of an existing dashboard to the Library:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to copy.
(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the library.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard and select Duplicate to
create a copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the Dashboard Library, select the new dashboard, right-click the dashboard name
or click Options for this dashboard, and select Edit to open the Dashboard Settings.
Change the dashboard name, Location, and access permissions.

NOTE: A public item is visible to all users in your user group. A private item is visible to you
and any user in your user group with Edit permissions on this item type. See Default User
Access Level Privileges and Customizing Access Level Privileges in User Manager help
for details.

4. Save the modified Dashboard Settings.

86 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Editing a dashboard
Edit dashboards to update the dashboard name, add new gadgets, change the dashboard styling,
change the access permissions or change the location of the dashboard in the Dashboard Library.
To edit a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to edit.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard and select Edit to open
the Dashboard Settings. Change the dashboard name, add gadgets, change the dashboard
styling, change the access permissions, or change the location of the dashboard in the
Library.

NOTE: A public item is visible to all users in your user group. A private item is visible to you
and any user in your user group with Edit permissions on this item type. See Default User
Access Level Privileges and Customizing Access Level Privileges in User Manager help
for details.

3. Save the modified dashboard settings.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 87

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Sharing a dashboard
Share dashboards with other User Groups.

NOTE: For Sharing to be enabled, at least one user group, in addition to the Global group, must be
configured. To share an item with another user group, you must be a member of that group. The
item to be shared must be marked as Public, not Private.

To share a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to share.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard and select Share. This
opens the Share Dashboard window.

3. In Share Dashboard, select the User Groups you want to share this dashboard with.

4. (Optional) Specify a name for the shared dashboard. The groups you are sharing this
dashboard with will see this name. The name of the original dashboard remains unchanged.

5. Click OK to share this dashboard.

NOTE: When you share an item with another user group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared item.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

88 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Moving a dashboard
Move dashboards to a different location in the Dashboard Library to make them easier to find or
easier to manage.
To move a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to move.
(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the library.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard and select Move To....
This opens the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location where you want to move this dashboard.

4. Click OK to move the dashboard.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Deleting a dashboard
Delete dashboards that are no longer needed.
To delete a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to delete.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the dashboard from the Dashboard Library.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 89

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Set default options for a dashboard

The default dashboard is the one that is displayed when you first open Dashboards. You can set a
dashboard to be your own personal default, or the default for the system.

NOTE: For each user, Set as my default supersedes Set as system default. For example, if a
user with supervisor-level access sets a dashboard as the system default dashboard, and another
user sets a different dashboard as their default dashboard, that user's default dashboard takes
priority over the system default dashboard, but only for them.

To set the default options for a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to set as
default.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard and select Set as
default to open the Configure Default Item dialog.

3. Turn on one or both of Set as my default and Set as system default.

4. Click OK to save the modified Dashboard Settings.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

90 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Configuring a slideshow
Use the Slideshow Manager to create, edit, or delete a slideshow.

NOTE: Anyone with access to the PME web server can view a slideshow using the slideshow
URL. No user authentication is required, except when using a Table gadget (See Using Table
gadget in Slideshow for more information). Restrict network access and access to the URL to
authorized users for slideshows containing confidential information.

NOTE: If you create a Dashboard that contains multiple gadgets, use the scroll bar to view all the
gadgets. But, if you use this Dashboard in a Slideshow, you do not have access to scroll bar to
view all the gadgets. It is recommended that you consider this condition when choosing which
Dashboard to include in a Slideshow.

Creating a slideshow
To create a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click Add Slideshow to open the Add New Slideshow dialog.

3. Type a name for the slideshow in the Name field.

4. Click any of the dashboards in the Shared Dashboards list to add them to the Dashboard
Playlist area on the right. Alternatively, begin typing in the Search field to filter the list for
selection.

The dashboards are listed in the Playlist area in the order that you selected them.

5. To modify the list of dashboards in the Dashboard Playlist, click the dashboard name to
display the edit options, then:
a. Click the Delete icon to remove the dashboard from the Playlist.

b. Click the Up or Down arrow to move the dashboard to an earlier or later sequence in the
Playlist, respectively.

6. Select the speed for the transition from dashboard to dashboard in the Select Transition
Time list.

7. Click OK to save your slideshow.

8. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 91

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Editing an existing slideshow

To edit an existing slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to edit, then click Edit to open the Edit
Slideshow dialog.

3. Change the name of slideshow, modify the dashboards in the play list, change the slide
caption for the slideshow, or adjust the slide transition time.

4. Click OK to save your changes and to return to the Slideshow Manager.

5. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Deleting a slideshow
To delete a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to delete, then click Delete to open the
Delete Slideshow dialog.

3. Click OK to permanently delete the slideshow and to return to the Slideshow Manager.

4. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Sharing a slideshow
To share a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to share, then click Share to open the
Share Slideshow URL dialog.

The dialog includes the URL for the slideshow, which you can copy and distribute so that
others can access the slideshow.

NOTE: The client browser must have access to the URL to view the slideshow.

3. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

92 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Adding a gadget to a dashboard

Add gadgets to a dashboard to display historical and real-time data. Without gadgets, a dashboard
does not display any data.

NOTE: Gadgets that require special licensing only appear in the list after the correct licensing has
been installed.

To add a gadget to the dashboard:

1. Click Add Gadget to open the Gadget Setup dialog.

By default, all gadgets are included in the dialog. To filter the gadgets by category, click one of
the categories on the left, for example Common or Comparison.

2. Select the gadget that you want to add to the dashboard and click Next.
Gadget settings are specific to each gadget. For example, some gadgets require a data series
consisting of sources and measurements, while other gadgets have no such requirement.

3. Click Next to proceed through the pages of the Gadget Setup dialog.

4. Click Finish to close the Gadget Setup dialog and to add the gadget to the dashboard.

5. Repeat the process to add additional gadgets to your dashboard.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 93

Configuring EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Editing a gadget
To edit the settings for a gadget:

1. Click Settings in the gadget and select Edit to open the Gadget Setup.

2. In Gadget Setup, change any of the settings on the tabs.

3. Click Save to update the gadget settings and to close the Gadget Setup dialog.

TIP: In gadgets where a time range has been specified when the gadgets are configured, the time
range selection is included on the gadgets in the dashboard. You can quickly change the time
range for the gadget by selecting another period of time from the list in the time range field. The
time range is applied to the gadget only while you continue to view the dashboard. If you navigate
to another dashboard and then come back to this dashboard, the time range on the gadget reverts
to the value that you set when you configured the gadget.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

You can move or resize a gadget on a dashboard when the dashboard is in edit mode.

Moving a gadget
1. Right-click a dashboard name in the Dashboard Library, then click Edit in the menu.

2. Position the mouse pointer in the title area of the gadget that you want to move.

The pointer changes to the Move shape (an image with 4 arrows).

3. Drag and drop the gadget to another position on the dashboard.

94 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Configuring

Other gadgets on the dashboard are re-positioned if additional space is required.

4. Click Finish in Dashboard Controls to save your change.

Resizing a gadget
1. Right-click a dashboard name in the Dashboard Library, then click Edit in the menu.

2. Position the mouse pointer at the lower right corner of the gadget.

A small triangular shape indicates that you can drag the corner.

3. Drag the corner to increase or reduce the size of the gadget.

Other gadgets on the dashboard are re-positioned if additional space is required.

4. Click Finish in Dashboard Controls to save your change.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Adding a new dashboard

• Editing a dashboard

• Sharing a dashboard

• Moving a dashboard

• Deleting a dashboard

• Set default options for a dashboard

• Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

• Adding a gadget to a dashboard

• Editing a gadget

• Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 95

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Operating
This chapter includes the following topics:

1. Accessing Dashboards and Slideshows

2. Accessing Reports

3. Accessing Alarms

4. Accessing EWS real-time values (only for Architecture 2 solutions)

5. Accessing device diagrams (only for Architecture 2 solutions)

NOTE: For these applications to display correctly in Building Operation WebStation, you must use
a supported Web browser version. See Operating Environment for details.

96 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Operating

1. Accessing Dashboards and Slideshows

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Use the Dashboards application to view high level historical and real-time data, for example Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs). The information in the Dashboards application is accessed through
dashboards with gadgets. Dashboards are saved in the Dashboard Library. In addition to viewing
individual dashboards, you can create slideshows to automatically display a sequence of
dashboards.

TIP: You can open the Dashboards application from the Dashboards link in the Web Applications
banner.

For information on how use the Dashboards application, see:

• Viewing Dashboards

• Dashboard Slideshows

• Playing a Slideshow

For more information on this feature, see the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert 2021 System
Guide.

Viewing Dashboards
View Dashboards to monitor key performance indicators, historical trends, and other high-level
information for the monitored power system. Dashboards are one of the main applications for
viewing power system information.
To view a Dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open an existing Dashboard from the Dashboard Library or add a new
Dashboard.

2. View the Dashboard Gadgets displayed in the Dashboards display pane.

Related topics:

• Viewing Dashboards

• Dashboard Slideshows

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 97

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Playing a Slideshow

Dashboard Slideshows
Use slideshows to create collections of dashboards that are displayed in sequence without user
interaction. A slideshow displays each of its dashboards for a short period of time and then displays
the next dashboard. When it reaches the end, it starts over again with the first dashboard. It
continuously cycles through all its dashboards in this way. Slideshows are a good option for
unattended, kiosk type displays. See Configuring a slideshow for more details.
Related topics:

• Viewing Dashboards

• Dashboard Slideshows

• Playing a Slideshow

Playing a Slideshow
Slideshows are a good option for unattended, kiosk type displays.

NOTE: Anyone with access to the PME web server can view a slideshow using the slideshow
URL. No user authentication is required, except when using a Table gadget (See Using Table
gadget in Slideshow for more information). Restrict network access and access to the URL to
authorized users for slideshows containing confidential information.

NOTE: If you create a Dashboard that contains multiple gadgets, use the scroll bar to view all the
gadgets. But, if you use this Dashboard in a Slideshow, you do not have access to scroll bar to
view all the gadgets. It is recommended that you consider this condition when choosing which
Dashboard to include in a Slideshow.

To play a Slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboards Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Options
menu at the top of the Dashboard Library. This opens the Slideshow Manager window.

2. In Slideshow Manager, select the slideshow you want to view, and click Play. This opens a
new browser window, playing the slideshow.

3. Return to the original browser window and click Close in the Slideshow Manager to close it.
The slideshow continues to play in the new browser window until you close that window.

Related topics:

• Viewing Dashboards

• Dashboard Slideshows

• Playing a Slideshow

98 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Operating

2. Accessing Reports

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Use the Reports application to generate historical data reports. You can view the reports in PME or
download them in different formats for sharing or storing externally. To generate a report, you can
either run it manually, setup an automatic schedule, or define trigger events such as a system
disturbance.

Reports are based on historical data that is stored in the PME database. A report can simply display
the historical data, or it can process data to show patterns and relationships. The Tabular Report is
an example of a simple report that shows data in a table. The Energy Modeling report is an example
of a report that processes different types of input data to produce predictions and comparisons
displayed in chart and diagram formats.

Reports are generated based on report templates. PME provides a wide range of default templates.
You can change the colors and logo used for these templates. To customize the types of inputs or
outputs of the default templates you need to create custom templates. Creating custom templates
requires engineering work outside of PME.

The Reports user interface (UI) has two main areas: Report Library and Reports Display. To see a
report in the Reports Display, you select the report in the Report Library.

TIP: You can open Reports from the REPORTS link in the Web Applications banner.

For more information see:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 99

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Generating a report

• Downloading a report

Report templates
The default PME report templates cover a wide range of applications. The templates are grouped
into categories based on application. Choose the templates that best meet your reporting needs.
See the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide for more information on Report
templates.

NOTE: Some report templates are part of add-on software modules for PME. Those reports are
enabled through the module licenses.

Subscriptions
Subscribe to a report to have it generated automatically based on a schedule or on a trigger event.
For example, you can subscribe to a report and have it generated daily at a certain time, or monthly
on a certain day and time. A trigger event can be any event in the system, for example a device
setpoint going active, or a breaker tripping.

For more information on this feature, see the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert 2021 System
Guide.

Generating a report
Generate a report to view power monitoring system information.
To generate a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to generate.

2. Click the report name to display the report in the Reports Display pane.

3. Set the input parameters for the report and click Generate Report.

NOTE: Saved input parameters are preset to their saved values. Not saved input parameters
have generic default values.

4. The report output is displayed in the Reports Display pane.

Related topics:

• Generating a report

• Downloading a report

Downloading a report
Download a report in one of the supported formats (PDF, Excel, Tiff Image) to share the report
output with others, or to save it externally
To download a report:

1. In Reports, generate a report.

100 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Operating

2. In the Reports Display pane, view the generated report and click Download report as on the
toolbar immediately above the report output. Choose the format you want to download the
report in.

3. The report is downloaded in the selected format.

Related topics:

• Generating a report

• Downloading a report

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 101

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Accessing Alarms
Alarms are automatically transferred from PME to Building Operation through EWS, and appear with
all other alarms in the Alarms pane, when both the Interface and the Alarm Polling are enabled.

NOTE: To verify that the Interface and the Alarm Polling are enabled: In the System Tree, right-
click on the PME/EBO Integration > EWS Client folder, and then select Properties.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To view the Alarms for this client:

1. Log into Building Operation WorkStation

2. Scroll down to the Alarms viewer pane at the bottom of the dialog to see all active alarms,

The Building Operation “Sum Alarm” is an ideal way to leverage alarms flowing from EWS. It allows
the users to create actions and notifications on filtered PME alarms. See the EcoStruxure Building
Operation System Reference Guide for more information.

102 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Operating

4. Accessing EWS real-time values (only for Architecture 2

solutions)
The PME/EBO Integration folder that you imported into Building Operation contains groups, devices
and measurements within the EWS Client folder.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To access EWS real-time values:

1. Log in to Building Operation WorkStation.

2. In the System Tree, navigate to the PME/EBO Integration folder and click the EWS Client
folder. The EWS Client tab appears.

3. Click the “+” icon next to each subfolder in the System Tree to expand the contents of each,
and then click on an item in the subfolder. The List View appears in the right pane and shows a
list of measurements for that item.

4. Double-click a device to view the complete list of measurements for that device.

5. In the EWS Client pane, right-click on a column heading, and then select Add/Remove
Columns.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 103

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

6. Select the check box next to Value and EWS State. Now, the two new columns with data
appear.

NOTE: The default refresh rate for EWS values is set to 20 seconds.

NOTE: If you find that some measurements for a device are missing from the list of
measurements, do the following:
Confirm that all of the measurements you want for that device are exposed. See Modifying which
measurements EWS Server exposes by default for details. If all of the measurements you want for
the device are exposed but still do not appear in the list of measurements, repeat the procedure to
create and host the EWS interface. (PME takes some time between enabling the EWS server and
when the EWS client shows the exposed measurements.) See Creating and hosting the EWS
interface in Building Operation Workstation for details.

104 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Operating

5. Accessing device diagrams (only for Architecture 2 solutions)

You can access PME device diagrams from within Building Operation in order to view graphical data
for the device data you imported.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To access device diagrams

1. Log in to Building Operation WorkStation.

2. In the System Tree, navigate to PME/EBO Integration and click the Diagram Links folder. You
will find a list of Web Diagram links in the Diagram Links pane at the right for the default Web
Diagrams that you selected and exported with the web application Integration Utility settings.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 105

Operating EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. In the Diagram Links tab, double-click a Web Diagram file. The Web Diagram graphic opens
for this device.

4. Select the different tabs in the Web Diagram screen to view other data values for this device.

106 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Reference
This chapter contains specific information on technical details related to the PME/EBO Integration
solution. This information is referenced in the other sections of this document.

Use the links below to find the item you are looking for:

Add-on device drivers for PME

Advanced ETL Configuration References
Configuring the PME EWS server for HTTPS
Configuring the PME EWS server regional setting
Database growth calculations
Default device type support
Deploying and configuring a Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar graphic component
Deploying and configuring a Single-input Thermometer graphic component
Exposing custom device driver measurements through EWS
Manual integration steps without using the web application Integration Utility settings
PME IP Ports
Setting SQL Server memory options
Terms and definitions
Time synchronization for ION meters
Web Applications settings
Web security changes

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 107

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Add-on device drivers for PME

You can download add-on device drivers from the Exchange community. See Resources for
contact information.

For devices, for which default drivers or downloadable add-on drivers do not exist, you can use the
Device Type Editor (DTE) tool in PME to create custom device drivers. For more information on this
feature, see the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert 2021 System Guide.

108 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Advanced ETL Configuration References

This section contains reference information related to the ETL.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Position Counters
Logging setup
Extract task: Setting parameters and recommended values
Transform task: Setting parameters and recommended values
Load task: Setting parameters and recommended values
Manage ETL jobs
Tips for working with mappings
ETL tips and tricks
Measurement mapping for ETL

Position Counters
Position counters keep track of the data that is extracted from EBO and then loaded into PME. Each
Trend log specified in ETL has a position counter associated with it. The position counter represents
a timestamp of the most recent data point loaded for each Trend log. When ETL is run, only data
after this timestamp value is extracted from the EBO Trend log.

To view the position counters for the mapped Trend logs:

• Click the Positions tab. The Positions tab appears showing the position counters.

Resetting and resending the data (optional)

If you need to re-extract previously extracted data, or if you want to load data after a specific date,
you can manually update the position counter. Otherwise, manually updating the position counter is
not necessary.

To reset and resend the data for the mapped Trend logs:

1. Enter a specific value in the text box to set all position counters.

2. Click Initialize. Mapped Trend logs appear with associated timestamp data for each.

Now, the next time you run ETL, only data after the given timestamp is loaded.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 109

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Logging setup
The Logging feature allows you to enable the various logs where ETL writes the information
regarding the status of your ETL job. These logs can help when searching for the cause of an
unsuccessful ETL job.

To enable the ETL logs:

1. Select the applicable job in ETL from the dropdown menu and click Edit.

2. Click the Logging tab. The Logging tab appears.

3. Select the Enabled checkbox for the Trace Log, Error Log, Customer Log, and Windows Event
Log as required.

4. Provide the location for the log file in the Log File field or leave at the default location.

110 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

5. Set the Maximum Log File Size and Maximum Log Files for each log or leave at the default
settings.

6. If required, select the Enabled checkbox for Email Notifications and complete the fields for To
Email Address, From Email Address, and SMTP Server Address.

7. Click OK to save and exit the job.

Extract task: Setting parameters and recommended values

Extract task settings

Setting Name Description Setting Parameters / Recommended Values

Web Service
The maximum number
of threads to use when
contacting the EWS
server for the list of
Trend logs. Set value to
Number of
4 for most cases, Enter a value of 4.
threads to use
however, set value to a
lower number if the
EWS server is
overwhelmed with
requests.
The length of time (in
Timeout (in minutes) to wait for a
minutes) for response from the EWS Enter a value of 10.
EWS response server when requesting
information.
Web Service The user name for Web
Provide EBO Workstation user name.
User Name Service.
Web Service Password for the Web
Provide EBO Workstation password.
Password Service user name.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 111

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Setting Name Description Setting Parameters / Recommended Values

Provide URL information. Default URL

http://localhost:8080/EcoStruxure/DataExchange.
Replace “localhost:8080” with your web server
address and port as needed.
The URL of the
NOTE: For HTTPS EcoStruxure Web Service
Web Service EcoStruxure Web
connections, with a self-signed certificate, the
URL Service called by this
certificate validation must be disabled for ETL.
task.
To disable certificate validation, set
<IsServerCertificateValidationCheckEnabled>
to false in the ETL job file.
You can find the job file in <ETL installation
folder>\Jobs\

Communication Options
When set to True, ETL
will reuse digest
Enable the
authentication tokens
Digest
for communicating with
Authentication Set to 'True'
the EWS server. This
Token Reuse
can improve
Feature
communication
performance.
Reading Interval
When set to True,
allows the extract task
Interval Length to determine the reading
Set to 'True'
Discovery interval for each pair
based on each pair's
data.
Record State
Filter

112 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Setting Name Description Setting Parameters / Recommended Values

When set to True,
enables a check on
record state. Only
records with a specified
Limit Results record state will be
Based on Record used. all other records Set to 'False'
State will be ignored. When
set to false, check is
disabled and all records
regardless of their
record state are used.
Sets the specific record
check to be used by the
Limit Results Based on
Allowed Record Record state setting.
Value not used if Limit Results setting is 'False'.
State Record states can be
Good, Uncertain,
Forced, Offline, or
Error.

Transform task: Setting parameters and recommended values

Transform task settings

Setting Parameters /
Setting Name Description
Recommended Values
Transform
Specifies the method used when
Intervalization Use default 'Last Known Value'
converting the values from an irregular
Method setting
interval into a regular interval.
When set to True, the data is
intervalized up to the current system
Intervalize to
time. If set to false, the data is Set value to “False”
present time
intervalized up to the most recent data
point.
Interval value in minutes. Select a
Target Reading Data is intervalized to a reading value from the dropdown list. Default
Interval (minutes) interval specified in this field. value of 15 minutes is suitable in most
cases.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 113

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Load task: Setting parameters and recommended values

Load task settings

NOTE: You must set the Enable Recorder and Channel Creation parameter to ‘True’ in order for
some Energy-related reports to run:

Setting Parameters /
Setting Name Description
Recommended Values
Database Settings
Time in seconds before stopping a
Default value is 3600 seconds (1
SQL Command Timeout SQL command attempt and
hour).
generating a message.
Provide connection information to
Application Modules database for
Database Settings Connection string to the
your system. Information can be
(Application Modules) Application Modules database
found through SQL Management
Studio.
Provide connection information to
Database Settings Connection string to the ION_ ION_Data database for your
(ION_Data) Data database system. Information can be found
through SQL Management Studio.
Connection string to the ION_
Network_Database where source Provide connection information to
Database Settings information should be loaded. ION_Network database for your
(ION_Network) Only applicable if the Enable system. Information can be found
Network Database Source through SQL Management Studio.
Creation setting is True.
Group Name Settings
When set to 'True', the task adds
Add the 'Group Name' a group name prefix to all sources
Prefix to Sources if that do not already have one. Set to 'False'.
Needed When set to 'False', a group name
prefix will not be added.
The name provided in this setting If the previous setting is 'False',
Group Name is used as the Group Name prefix this setting does not need to be
setting described above. filled in.
Mapping Options – Source and Quantity End Names
Populate Button –
Automatically Set
Set to ‘False’.
Quantity ‘End Names’ to
‘Start Names’

114 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Setting Parameters /
Setting Name Description
Recommended Values
Populate Button –
Automatically Set
Set to ‘False’.
Source ‘End Names’ to
‘Start Names’
Null Values
When set to 'False' the task
ignores any null values. When set
Allow Null Values Set to 'False'.
to 'True', null values in the data
set are inserted into the database.
Overwrite Values
Allow existing values to
Set to ‘False’.
be overwritten.
Recommended Source-Quantity Pairs Settings
Limit Recommended
Pairs to Known Set to ‘True’.
Quantities
Recorders and Channels
When set to 'False', the task does
not create recorders and channels
Enable Recorder and
while inserting data. Some reports Set to ‘True’.
Channel Creation
require that the parameter is set to
‘True’ to run.
Set the
ISCurrentConfiguration
Leave this default setting to ‘True’.
Flag to False for New
Channels
Source and Quantity Creation Settings
When set to 'False' disables
Enable Quantity
creating quantities if they are not Set to 'False'.
Creation
already in the database.
When set to 'True', the setting
Enable Source Creation enables the creation of sources
Set to 'True'.
in ION_Data that are not already in the ION_
Data database.
When set to 'True', the setting
Enable Source Creation enables the creation of sources
Set to 'True'.
in ION_Network that are not already in the ION_
Network database.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 115

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Setting Parameters /
Setting Name Description
Recommended Values
Set Active Flag for All When set to 'True', all new
Set to 'True'.
New Sources sources are marked as Active.
When set to 'True', enables
Set Measurement
setting the descriptive name of Set to 'True'.
Descriptive Name
new measurements.
When set to 'True', enables
Set Measurement
setting the engineering name of Set to 'True'.
Engineering Name
new measurements.
Source Namespace Settings
Namespace given to all sources
Source Namespace that do not have a namespace or
IONEnterprise
Override that are created during the Load
Task.
Source Type Settings
When set to 'True', enables the
Override Source Type use of the Source Type Override Set to 'True'.
value when creating sources.
The source type to use when
Source Type Override Presumed downstream device.
creating sources.

Manage ETL jobs

You can set up logging to help manage ETL jobs. You can also switch between ETL jobs, change
the order of ETL tasks, and remove ETL tasks from an ETL job.

Switching between ETL jobs

1. Click OK at the bottom right to save and exit the current job.

2. In the Job Management list select an ETL job and click Edit.

Removing a task from an ETL job

1. In the Job Management list click the applicable ETL job and then click Edit.

2. Click the Tasks tab.

3. Highlight the task that you want to remove from the left pane.

4. Click Delete

5. Click OK to save and exit the job.

116 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Tips for working with mappings

Loading sources can return thousands of rows. To help you manage a large result set, the
ETL Administration Tool includes several features to help you search, filter, and update loaded
sources.

Highlighting rows

Highlighting a source row lets you work with that source. When you highlight a row you can copy,
include or exclude the row from the ETL job, or perform a batch edit on the row.
To highlight a row:

1. Click the row.

To highlight successive rows:

1. Click the row.

2. Press Shift and click another row.

To highlight non-successive rows:

1. Press Ctrl and click the desired rows.

To highlight all rows:

1. Press Ctrl + A.

Batch Edits

A batch edit lets you update all highlighted rows at once.

To perform a batch edit:

1. In the Mappings pane highlight the rows you want to edit.

2. Right-click and click Batch Edit.

The Batch Edit Mappings dialog appears.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 117

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Complete all applicable fields in the dialog as needed.

NOTE: You have to complete the Target Device and Target Measurement fields before you
can select Included for the row.

4. While the rows are still highlighted, right-click and click Include Selected Mapping(s). The
Included check box is checked for the selected rows and these devices are included in the
job.

5. Click OK, and then click Apply to save the changes to the job. The Batch Edit values appear
for the selected rows.

Sorting contents by column

To sort contents by column:

1. Right-click a column heading and from the sort menu choose to sort column contents by
ascending or descending order.

Searching by column

To search by column:

1. Click in the Auto Filter Row (search field below a column heading.)

2. Begin typing characters. Column contents appear based on the search criteria you enter. Note
that characters are not case sensitive.

Filtering content by column

To filter the contents by column:

1. Click the filter symbol to the right of the column heading, and then choose (Custom), (Blanks),
(Non blanks), Checked, Unchecked, or a specific device.

2. If you choose (Custom), you can define a unique filter, based on your input, in the Custom

118 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

AutoFilter dialog. Complete the fields in the dialog and then click OK.

Filtering content using the Filter Editor

To filter the contents using the Filter Editor:

1. Right-click the column header you want to filter and select Filter Editor.

You must complete the Target Device and Target Measurement fields before you can select
Included for the row.

2. Click an operator or enter a filter value.

3. Click Apply.

The sources are filtered based on the filtering criteria you enter.

4. Click OK to return to the Mappings tab.

Copying and pasting devices

You can select and copy one or more devices and paste that data into a document, such as a text
editor or a spreadsheet.
To copy and paste devices into a document:

1. In the Mappings tab select one or more device rows.

2. Press CTRL+C or right-click and click Copy.

3. Open your document and place the cursor where you want to paste.

4. Press CTRL+V or right-click and click Paste.

The device data appears in the document.

Measurement mapping for ETL

This table describes the suggested mappings for supported EBO values:

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Absolute voltage in dB

dBuV

AbsoluteHumidityMass

kg/kg

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 119

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

lb/lb

Acceleration

meters per second squared m/s²

feet per second squared ft/s²

inches per second squared in/s²

Acidity

pH

Angle

radian rad

Fundamental Current Angle A

Fundamental Current Angle B
deg Fundamental Current Angle C
Fundamental Current Angle N
Fundamental Current Angle G

grad

Angular momentum

joule second Js

Area

square meter m²

square inch in²

square foot ft²

square yard yd²

acre a.

square mile mile²

Capacitance

farad F

Compressibility

meters squared per Newton m²/N

Conductance

siemens S

Conductivity

siemens per meter S/m

Corrosion Rate

m/yr

in/yr

Currency

120 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Energy Cost
Energy Cost AUD
currency1 Energy Cost EUR
Energy Cost GBP
Energy Cost CNY

currency2

currency3

currency4

currency5

currency6

currency7

currency8

currency9

currency10

Current

Current Phase
Average
Current Phase A
A Current Phase B
Current Phase C
Neutral Current
Ground Current

Current Density

A/m² Current Density (A/m^2)

Density

grams per cubic meter g/m³

pounds per cubic inch lb/in³

pounds per cubic foot lb/ft³

Diffusivity

meters squared per second m²/s

foot squared per second ft²/s

Dipole Moment

debye

coulombmeter

Electrical Field Strength

V/m

Energy

Active Energy Delivered (kWh)

Wh Active Energy Received (kWh)
Active Energy Delivered-Received (kWh)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 121

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Water Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Energy Consumption (BTU ISO)
Air Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Air Heat Flow (BTU ISO)
Natural Gas Energy Flow (BTU 59)
Btu
Natural Gas Energy Flow (BTU ISO)
Steam Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Steam Heat Flow (BTU ISO)
Hot Water (Btu)
Gas btus

cal

thermal

tonh

Energy Apparent

Apparent Energy
Received (KVAh)
Vah
Apparent Energy
Delivered-Received (KVAh)

Energy Reactive

Reactive Energy
Delivered (kvarh)
Reactive Energy
Varh
Received (kvarh)
Reactive Energy
Delivered-Received (kvarh)

Enthalpy

J/kg Specific Enthalpy (J/kg)

Btu/lb Specific Enthalpy (BTU 59/lb av)

Enthalpy Dry Air

J/kg dry air Specific Enthalpy Dry Air (J/kg)

Btu/lb dry air Specific Enthalpy Dry Air (BTU 59/lb av)

Entropy

J/K

Flow

Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)

Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (m^3/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (m^3/s)
cubic meters per second m³/s Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply
(m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return
cubic meters per minute m³/min (m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)

122 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (m^3/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (m^3/h)
cubic meters per hour m³/h Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
cubic feet per second ft³/s Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
cubic feet per minute ft³/min Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
cubic feet per hour ft³/h Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/s)
gallons per second Usgal/s
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/min)
gallons per minute Usgal/min
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/h)
gallons per hour Usgal/h
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/s)
liters per second l/s
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/min)
liters per minute l/min
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/h)
liters per hour l/h
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/h)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 123

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (fl oz
imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (fl oz
liq oz/s imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate (fl oz imp/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (fl oz
imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal
imp/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal
imperial gallons per minute Ukgal/min imp/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal imp/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal
imp/min)

Flow Rate Mass

g/s

lb/s

oz/s

g/min

g/h

lb/min

Uston/h

Force

lbf

Frequency

Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (MHz)
Hz
Frequency (kHz)
Frequency (MHz)

cycles/min

cycles/h

/s

/min

/h

%/s

Grammage (GSM)

Grammage (GSM) (g/m²)

Grammage (GSM) (mg/m²)
g/m²
Grammage (GSM) (kg/m²)
Grammage (GSM) (Mg/m²)

Heat Capacity

J/(g·C) Specific Heat Capacity (J/(g deg C))

Specific Heat Capacity (BTU 59/(lb av

Btu/(lb·F)
deg F))

Heat Degree Days

124 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

°Cdays Heating Degree Days Celsius

°Fdays Heating Degree Days Fahrenheit

Heat Flux

W/m²

Btu/(s·ft²)

W/ft²

Heat Transfer Coefficient

W/(m²·K) Heat Transfer Coefficient (W/(m^2 K))

Heat Transfer Coefficient (BTU 59/(s ft^2

Btu/(s·ft²·K)
K))

Humidity

Relative Humidity (Hour Interval)

Air Relative Humidity Supply (percent)
% Rh Air Relative Humidity Return (percent)
Air Relative Humidity Mixed (percent)
Weather Relative Humidity

Illuminance

Illuminance (lx)
Illuminance (Mlx)
Illuminance (Klx)
Illuminance (Mlx)
lux lx Global Horizontal Illuminance (Hour
Interval)
Direct Normal Illuminance (Hour Interval)
Diffuse Horizontal Illuminance (Hour
Interval)

ft·cd

Illuminance (H)
Illuminance (mH)
Candelas per sq. meter H
Illuminance (kH)
Illuminance (MH)

Inductance

henry H

Length

meter m

inch in

foot ft

yard yd

mile mile

Linear Momentum

Newton Second Ns

Luminance

candelas per square meter cd/m²

Luminous Flux

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 125

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

lm

Luminous Intensity

cd

Magnetic Dipole Moment

A·m²

Magnetic Field Strength

A/m

Magnetic Flux

Wb

Magnetic Flux Density

Mass

gram g

pound lb

ounce oz

carat

grains

USTon

Mass Transfer Coefficient

(mol/(s·m²))/
(mol/m³)
(mol/(s·ft²))/
(mol/ft³)

Mass Velocity

g/(s·m²)

lb/(s·ft²)

Moles

mole mol

lbmol

Moment of Inertia

g/m²

lb/ft²

Momentum

g·m/s

lb·ft/s

NoCategory

NoUnit

126 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Percent Obscuration

%/m

%/ft

Percentage

Damper Position (percent)

%
Valve Position (percent)
CO₂Concentration Indoor (ppm)
ppm
CO₂Concentration Outdoor (ppm)

ppb

Phase

deg

Power

Active Power Phase B (kW)

W Active Power Phase A (kW)
Active Power Phase C (kW)
Apparent Power Phase A (KVA)
VA Apparent Power Phase B (KVA)
Apparent Power Phase C (KVA)

Btu/s

hp

Water Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)

Water Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Energy Consumption Rate (BTU 59/h)
Energy Consumption Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Air Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)
Air Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Btu/h
Natural Gas Energy Flow Rate (BTU
59/h)
Natural Gas Energy Flow Rate (BTU
ISO/h)
Steam Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)
Steam Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)

tons refrig

Power Factor

Power Factor Signed Phase A

cosf Power Factor Signed Phase B
Power Factor Signed Phase C

Power Reactive

Reactive Power Phase A (kvar)

var Reactive Power Phase B (kvar)
Reactive Power Phase C (kvar)

Pressure

Air Pressure (N/m^2)

Natural Gas Pressure (N/m^2)
Steam Pressure (N/m^2)
N/m²
Water Pressure Supply (N/m^2)
Water Pressure Return (N/m^2)
Water Pressure (N/m^2)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 127

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Pressure (Pa)
Natural Gas Pressure (Pa)
Steam Pressure (Pa)
Pa Water Pressure Supply (Pa)
Water Pressure Return (Pa)
Water Pressure (Pa)
Water Pressure Differential (kPa)
Air Pressure psi Natural Gas Pressure
(psi)
Steam pressure (psi)
psi
Water Pressure Supply (psi)
Water Pressure Return (psi)
Water Pressure (psi)
Air Pressure (m Hg)
Natural Gas Pressure (N/m^2)
Steam Pressure (N/m^2)
mHg
Water Pressure Supply (N/m^2)
Water Pressure Return (N/m^2)
Water Pressure (N/m^2
Air Pressure (in H2O)
Natural Gas Pressure (in H2O)
Steam Pressure (in H2O)
inH₂0
Water Pressure Supply (in H2O)
Water Pressure Return (in H2O)
Water Pressure (in H2O)
Air Pressure (bar)
Natural Gas Pressure (bar)
Steam Pressure (bar)
Water Pressure Supply (bar)
bar
Water Pressure Return (bar)
Water Pressure (bar)
Water Pressure Differential (bar)
Air Pressure Absolute (bar)
Air Pressure (m H2O)
Natural Gas Pressure (m H2O)
Steam Pressure (m H2O)
mH₂0
Water Pressure Supply (m H2O)
Water Pressure Return (m H2O)
Water Pressure (m H2O)
Air Pressure (in Hg)
Natural Gas Pressure (in Hg)
Steam Pressure (in Hg)
inHg
Water Pressure Supply (in Hg)
Water Pressure Return (in Hg)
Water Pressure (in Hg)

db (SPL) Sound Pressure Level (dB)

Pressure Drop Per Length

Air Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)

Natural Gas Pressure Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Steam Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)
Pa/m Water Pressure Supply Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Water Pressure Return Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Water Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)

128 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)
Natural Gas Pressure Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Steam Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)
psi/ft Water Pressure Supply Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Water Pressure Return Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Water Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)

Resistance

ohm Ω Resistance
Resistivity

ohm meter Ωm

Specific Entropy

J(g·K)

Btu/(lb·R)

J/(kg·K)

Specific Humidity

g H₂0/kg dry air

Specific Volume

m³/g

ft³/lb

Surface Energy Density

J/m²

J/ft²

W/(h·m²)

W/(h·ft²)

Surface Tension

N/m²

lbf/ft

Temperature

Weather Temperature Celsius

Water Temperature (deg C)
Water Temperature Supply (deg C)
Water Temperature Return (deg C)
Water Temperature Mixed (deg C)
Air Temperature (deg C)
Air Temperature Return (deg C)
°C
Air Temperature Supply (deg C)
Steam Temperature (deg C)
Compressed Air Temperature (deg C)
Natural Gas Temperature (deg C)
Steam Temperature (deg C)
Ambient Temperature Celsius
Temperature Celsius

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 129

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Weather Temperature Fahrenheit
Water Temperature (deg F)
Water Temperature Supply (deg F)
Water Temperature Return (deg F)
Water Temperature Mixed (deg F)
Air Temperature (deg F)
Air Temperature Return (deg F)
°F
Air Temperature Supply (deg F)
Steam Temperature (deg F)
Compressed Air Temperature (deg F)
Natural Gas Temperature (deg F)
Steam Temperature (deg F)
Ambient Temperature Fahrenheit
Temperature Fahrenheit

Temperature Diff

Weather Temperature Differential (deg C)

Water Temperature Differential (deg C)
Water Temperature Supply Differential
(deg C)
Water Temperature Return Differential
(deg C)
Δ°C
Water Temperature Mixed Differential
(deg C)
Air Temperature Differential (deg C)
Steam Temperature Differential (deg C)
Temperature Differential (deg C)
Ambient Temperature Differential (deg C)

ΔK

Weather Temperature Differential (deg F)

Water Temperature Differential (deg F)
Water Temperature Supply Differential
(deg F)
Water Temperature Return Differential
(deg F)
Δ°F
Water Temperature Mixed Differential
(deg F)
Air Temperature Differential (deg F)
Steam Temperature Differential (deg F)
Temperature Differential (deg F)
Ambient Temperature Differential (deg F)

Temperature Rate of Change

130 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
°C/min
Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min

K/min

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change

(deg F/min)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/min)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°F/min (deg F/min)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/min)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/min)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 131

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/h)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°C/h (deg C/h)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/h)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/h)

K/h

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change

(deg F/h)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/h)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°F/h (deg F/h)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/h)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/h)

Thermal Conductance

W/(m²·K)

Thermal Conductivity

Air Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))

Water Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))
W/(m²·K/m) Steam Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))
Natural Gas Thermal Conductivity (W/(m
K))

132 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Water Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Btu/(h·ft²·F/ft)
Steam Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Natural Gas Thermal Conductivity (BTU
59/(h ft deg F))

Thermal Linear Expansion

m/C

in/F

ft/F

Thermal Pressure

psi/oF

Thermal Volume Expansion

m³/C

in³/F

ft³/F

Thermoelectric Power

V/K

Time

year

month

week

day

min

Time Accuracy

s/h

Torque

Nm

lbf·in

lbf·ft

Turbidity

NTU

Velocity

m/s Air Velocity (m/s)

m/h Air Velocity (m/h)

mile/h Air Velocity (mile/h)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 133

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

ft/s Air Velocity (ft/s)

ft/min Air Velocity (ft/min)

m/min Air Velocity (m/min)

Velocity Angular

radians per second rad/s

revolutions per minute RPM

Voltage

Average Voltage Line-to-Neutral

Voltage Phases AB
Voltage Phases BC
V Voltage Phases CA
Voltage Phases AN
Voltage Phases BN
Voltage Phases CN

Volume

Air Volume (m^3)

Steam Volume (m^3)
m³ Wastewater Volume (m^3)
Water Volume (m^3)
Natural Gas Volume (m^3)

in³

Air Volume (cubft)

Steam Volume (cf)
ft³ Wastewater Volume (cf)
Water Volume (cf)
Gas Volume (cf)
Wastewater Volume (gal)
Usgal
Water Volume (gal)
Wastewater Volume (L)
litre
Water Volume (L)

ETL tips and tricks

Performing a Batch Edit for Trend logs
To perform a Batch Edit (map multiple Trend logs at once):

1. Highlight multiple rows in the Mappings tab by clicking and dragging downward the handles to
the left of the rows. To select all rows, press Ctrl+A.

134 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

2. Right-click and select Batch Edit. The Batch Edit Mappings dialog appears.

3. Complete all applicable fields in the dialog as needed.

You must complete the Target Device and Target Measurement fields before you can select
Included for the row.

4. While the rows are still highlighted, right-click and select Include Selected Mapping(s). The
Included check box is now checked for the selected rows and these Trend logs are now
included in the job.

5. Click OK, and then click Apply to save the changes to the job. The Batch Edit values now
appear for the selected rows.

See Measurement mapping for ETL to learn about the most common, supported measurements in
used in PME and how to link to typical Building Management tags.

Sorting contents by column

To sort contents by column:

• Right-click a column heading and choose from the sort menu to sort column contents by
ascending or descending order.

Searching contents by column

To search the contents by column:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 135

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

1. Click in the search field below a column heading.

2. Begin typing characters. Only column contents appear based on the search criteria you enter.
Note that characters are not case sensitive.

Searching Target Measurements by column

To search the Target Measurements by column:

1. Click in the search field below the column heading.

2. Begin typing characters. Only column contents appear based on the search criteria you enter.
Note that characters are not case sensitive.

See Measurement mapping for ETL to learn about the most common, supported measurements in
use in PME.

Filtering content by column

To filter the contents by column:

1. Click the filter symbol to the right of the column heading, and then choose (All), (Custom),
(Blanks), (Non blanks), or a specific Trend log.

2. If you choose (Custom), you can define a unique filter, based on your input, in the Custom

136 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

AutoFilter dialog. Complete the fields in the dialog and click OK.

Copying and pasting Trend logs

You can select and copy one or more Trend logs from Building Operation and paste that data into a
document, such as a text editor or a spreadsheet.

To copy and paste Trend logs into a document:

1. Select one or more rows in the Mappings tab.

2. Press Ctrl + C or right-click and choose Copy.

3. Open your document and place the cursor where you want to paste.

4. Press Ctrl + V or right-click and choose Paste.

5. The Trend log data appears in the document.

Finding and opening a Trend log in Building Operation

You can find and open a Trend log with the source tag path.

1. From the document created in the previous step Copy Source Tag(s) from the list.

2. Click in the Building Operation address bar.

3. Press Ctrl + V or right-click and choose Paste, and then press Enter. The Trend log opens.

Running a job manually

1. In the ETL Configuration Job Configuration Tool screen, select a job to run from the Job
Management drop-down list.

2. Click Control. The Job Control tab appears.

3. Click Run Once, and then click OK in the dialog when it appears. Wait until the output dialog
box appears (depending on your system size, this could take up to a few hours).

NOTE: To confirm the ETL job, look to see that the job executed successfully.

If the ETL Engine returns a Job execution failed message, click Open Log Folder in the dialog and
open the error log. Locate the timestamp that corresponds to your job and review the log. Based on
this information, make the appropriate changes to the job and then run the job again.

Running a job as a service

You can configure a job to run as a service. Using this method, the job automatically runs at set
times, based on the settings you provide in the Job tab. Make sure to change the Sleep Time
Between Execution value (in seconds) if you require the service to be run on a schedule different

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 137

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

from the default value of 3600 seconds.

NOTE: Run the service under a dedicated Windows user account.

To configure a dedicated Windows user account for an ETL job service:

1. Create a Windows user account with User access permissions.

NOTE: If the ETL is installed in its default location, C:\Program Files\..., then the
Windows user must have Administrator access.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices for password creation and management.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access - such as least privilege,
separation of duties - vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to
ensure that user access adheres to the site-specific cybersecurity policies.

2. Add the Windows user account to the PME SQL database server with db_owner rights to the
ION_Data and ION_Network databases.

To configure the ETL job to run as a service:

1. In the ETL Configuration Job Configuration Tool screen, select a job to run from the Job
Management drop-down list.

2. Click Control. The Job Control tab appears.

3. Click Register. ETL creates a registered service under the job name. Click OK in the dialog
when it appears. This option is available only after running a job successfully at least once.

4. Open Windows Services and change the Log On account for the service to the dedicated
Windows account.

5. In ETL Configuration Job Configuration, click Start/Continue to start the service.

6. Click Stop to stop the service or click Unregister to unregister the service for this job.

7. Press OK to save and exit job.

Managing your ETL jobs

You can also switch between jobs, change task order and remove tasks from a job.

Switching between jobs

1. Click OK at the bottom right to save and exit the current job.

2. Select another job in the Job Management drop-down list.

3. Click Edit.

138 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Changing the order of tasks for a job

1. Select a job from the Job Management drop-down list and click Edit.

2. Click the Tasks tab.

3. Highlight the task you want to move from the left pane.

4. Click the Up arrow or Down arrow icon to move the task.

5. Press OK to save and exit job.

Removing a task from a job

1. Select a job from the Job Management drop-down list and click Edit.

2. Click the Tasks tab.

3. Highlight the task you want to remove from the left pane.

4. Click the Delete icon. The task is removed from the pane.

5. Press OK to save and exit job.

Measurement mapping for ETL

This table describes the suggested mappings for supported EBO values:

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Absolute voltage in dB

dBuV

AbsoluteHumidityMass

kg/kg

lb/lb

Acceleration

meters per second squared m/s²

feet per second squared ft/s²

inches per second squared in/s²

Acidity

pH

Angle

radian rad

Fundamental Current Angle A

Fundamental Current Angle B
deg Fundamental Current Angle C
Fundamental Current Angle N
Fundamental Current Angle G

grad

Angular momentum

joule second Js

Area

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 139

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

square meter m²

square inch in²

square foot ft²

square yard yd²

acre a.

square mile mile²

Capacitance

farad F

Compressibility

meters squared per Newton m²/N

Conductance

siemens S

Conductivity

siemens per meter S/m

Corrosion Rate

m/yr

in/yr

Currency

Energy Cost
Energy Cost AUD
currency1 Energy Cost EUR
Energy Cost GBP
Energy Cost CNY

currency2

currency3

currency4

currency5

currency6

currency7

currency8

currency9

currency10

Current

Current Phase
Average
Current Phase A
A Current Phase B
Current Phase C
Neutral Current
Ground Current

Current Density

140 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

A/m² Current Density (A/m^2)

Density

grams per cubic meter g/m³

pounds per cubic inch lb/in³

pounds per cubic foot lb/ft³

Diffusivity

meters squared per second m²/s

foot squared per second ft²/s

Dipole Moment

debye

coulombmeter

Electrical Field Strength

V/m

Energy

Active Energy Delivered (kWh)

Wh Active Energy Received (kWh)
Active Energy Delivered-Received (kWh)
Water Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Energy Consumption (BTU ISO)
Air Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Air Heat Flow (BTU ISO)
Natural Gas Energy Flow (BTU 59)
Btu
Natural Gas Energy Flow (BTU ISO)
Steam Heat Flow (BTU 59)
Steam Heat Flow (BTU ISO)
Hot Water (Btu)
Gas btus

cal

thermal

tonh

Energy Apparent

Apparent Energy
Received (KVAh)
Vah
Apparent Energy
Delivered-Received (KVAh)

Energy Reactive

Reactive Energy
Delivered (kvarh)
Reactive Energy
Varh
Received (kvarh)
Reactive Energy
Delivered-Received (kvarh)

Enthalpy

J/kg Specific Enthalpy (J/kg)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 141

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Btu/lb Specific Enthalpy (BTU 59/lb av)

Enthalpy Dry Air

J/kg dry air Specific Enthalpy Dry Air (J/kg)

Btu/lb dry air Specific Enthalpy Dry Air (BTU 59/lb av)

Entropy

J/K

Flow

Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)

Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (m^3/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (m^3/s)
cubic meters per second m³/s Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/s)
Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply
(m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return
cubic meters per minute m³/min (m^3/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/min)
Steam Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (m^3/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (m^3/h)
cubic meters per hour m³/h Water Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Air Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (m^3/h)
Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
cubic feet per second ft³/s Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/s)
Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
cubic feet per minute ft³/min Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/min)

142 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Steam Volume Flow Rate(cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
cubic feet per hour ft³/h Air Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Air Volume Flow Rate (scf/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Natural Gas Volume Flow Rate (scf/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (cf/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/s)
gallons per second Usgal/s
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/min)
gallons per minute Usgal/min
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal/h)
gallons per hour Usgal/h
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/s)
liters per second l/s
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/min)
liters per minute l/min
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (L/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (L/h)
liters per hour l/h
Water Volume Flow Rate (L/h)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (L/h)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (fl oz
imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (fl oz
liq oz/s imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate (fl oz imp/s)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (fl oz
imp/s)
Water Volume Flow Rate Supply (gal
imp/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate Return (gal
imperial gallons per minute Ukgal/min imp/min)
Water Volume Flow Rate (gal imp/min)
Wastewater Volume Flow Rate (gal
imp/min)

Flow Rate Mass

g/s

lb/s

oz/s

g/min

g/h

lb/min

Uston/h

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 143

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Force

lbf

Frequency

Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (MHz)
Hz
Frequency (kHz)
Frequency (MHz)

cycles/min

cycles/h

/s

/min

/h

%/s

Grammage (GSM)

Grammage (GSM) (g/m²)

Grammage (GSM) (mg/m²)
g/m²
Grammage (GSM) (kg/m²)
Grammage (GSM) (Mg/m²)

Heat Capacity

J/(g·C) Specific Heat Capacity (J/(g deg C))

Specific Heat Capacity (BTU 59/(lb av

Btu/(lb·F)
deg F))

Heat Degree Days

°Cdays Heating Degree Days Celsius

°Fdays Heating Degree Days Fahrenheit

Heat Flux

W/m²

Btu/(s·ft²)

W/ft²

Heat Transfer Coefficient

W/(m²·K) Heat Transfer Coefficient (W/(m^2 K))

Heat Transfer Coefficient (BTU 59/(s ft^2

Btu/(s·ft²·K)
K))

Humidity

Relative Humidity (Hour Interval)

Air Relative Humidity Supply (percent)
% Rh Air Relative Humidity Return (percent)
Air Relative Humidity Mixed (percent)
Weather Relative Humidity

Illuminance

144 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Illuminance (lx)
Illuminance (Mlx)
Illuminance (Klx)
Illuminance (Mlx)
lux lx Global Horizontal Illuminance (Hour
Interval)
Direct Normal Illuminance (Hour Interval)
Diffuse Horizontal Illuminance (Hour
Interval)

ft·cd

Illuminance (H)
Illuminance (mH)
Candelas per sq. meter H
Illuminance (kH)
Illuminance (MH)

Inductance

henry H

Length

meter m

inch in

foot ft

yard yd

mile mile

Linear Momentum

Newton Second Ns

Luminance

candelas per square meter cd/m²

Luminous Flux

lm

Luminous Intensity

cd

Magnetic Dipole Moment

A·m²

Magnetic Field Strength

A/m

Magnetic Flux

Wb

Magnetic Flux Density

Mass

gram g

pound lb

ounce oz

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 145

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

carat

grains

USTon

Mass Transfer Coefficient

(mol/(s·m²))/
(mol/m³)
(mol/(s·ft²))/
(mol/ft³)

Mass Velocity

g/(s·m²)

lb/(s·ft²)

Moles

mole mol

lbmol

Moment of Inertia

g/m²

lb/ft²

Momentum

g·m/s

lb·ft/s

NoCategory

NoUnit

Percent Obscuration

%/m

%/ft

Percentage

Damper Position (percent)

%
Valve Position (percent)
CO₂Concentration Indoor (ppm)
ppm
CO₂Concentration Outdoor (ppm)

ppb

Phase

deg

Power

Active Power Phase B (kW)

W Active Power Phase A (kW)
Active Power Phase C (kW)
Apparent Power Phase A (KVA)
VA Apparent Power Phase B (KVA)
Apparent Power Phase C (KVA)

Btu/s

146 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

hp

Water Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)

Water Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Energy Consumption Rate (BTU 59/h)
Energy Consumption Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Air Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)
Air Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)
Btu/h
Natural Gas Energy Flow Rate (BTU
59/h)
Natural Gas Energy Flow Rate (BTU
ISO/h)
Steam Heat Flow Rate (BTU 59/h)
Steam Heat Flow Rate (BTU ISO/h)

tons refrig

Power Factor

Power Factor Signed Phase A

cosf Power Factor Signed Phase B
Power Factor Signed Phase C

Power Reactive

Reactive Power Phase A (kvar)

var Reactive Power Phase B (kvar)
Reactive Power Phase C (kvar)

Pressure

Air Pressure (N/m^2)

Natural Gas Pressure (N/m^2)
Steam Pressure (N/m^2)
N/m²
Water Pressure Supply (N/m^2)
Water Pressure Return (N/m^2)
Water Pressure (N/m^2)
Air Pressure (Pa)
Natural Gas Pressure (Pa)
Steam Pressure (Pa)
Pa Water Pressure Supply (Pa)
Water Pressure Return (Pa)
Water Pressure (Pa)
Water Pressure Differential (kPa)
Air Pressure psi Natural Gas Pressure
(psi)
Steam pressure (psi)
psi
Water Pressure Supply (psi)
Water Pressure Return (psi)
Water Pressure (psi)
Air Pressure (m Hg)
Natural Gas Pressure (N/m^2)
Steam Pressure (N/m^2)
mHg
Water Pressure Supply (N/m^2)
Water Pressure Return (N/m^2)
Water Pressure (N/m^2
Air Pressure (in H2O)
Natural Gas Pressure (in H2O)
Steam Pressure (in H2O)
inH₂0
Water Pressure Supply (in H2O)
Water Pressure Return (in H2O)
Water Pressure (in H2O)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 147

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Pressure (bar)
Natural Gas Pressure (bar)
Steam Pressure (bar)
Water Pressure Supply (bar)
bar
Water Pressure Return (bar)
Water Pressure (bar)
Water Pressure Differential (bar)
Air Pressure Absolute (bar)
Air Pressure (m H2O)
Natural Gas Pressure (m H2O)
Steam Pressure (m H2O)
mH₂0
Water Pressure Supply (m H2O)
Water Pressure Return (m H2O)
Water Pressure (m H2O)
Air Pressure (in Hg)
Natural Gas Pressure (in Hg)
Steam Pressure (in Hg)
inHg
Water Pressure Supply (in Hg)
Water Pressure Return (in Hg)
Water Pressure (in Hg)

db (SPL) Sound Pressure Level (dB)

Pressure Drop Per Length

Air Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)

Natural Gas Pressure Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Steam Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)
Pa/m Water Pressure Supply Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Water Pressure Return Drop Per Length
(Pa/m)
Water Pressure Drop Per Length (Pa/m)
Air Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)
Natural Gas Pressure Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Steam Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)
psi/ft Water Pressure Supply Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Water Pressure Return Drop Per Length
(psi/ft)
Water Pressure Drop Per Length (psi/ft)

Resistance

ohm Ω Resistance
Resistivity

ohm meter Ωm

Specific Entropy

J(g·K)

Btu/(lb·R)

J/(kg·K)

Specific Humidity

g H₂0/kg dry air

Specific Volume

m³/g

148 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

ft³/lb

Surface Energy Density

J/m²

J/ft²

W/(h·m²)

W/(h·ft²)

Surface Tension

N/m²

lbf/ft

Temperature

Weather Temperature Celsius

Water Temperature (deg C)
Water Temperature Supply (deg C)
Water Temperature Return (deg C)
Water Temperature Mixed (deg C)
Air Temperature (deg C)
Air Temperature Return (deg C)
°C
Air Temperature Supply (deg C)
Steam Temperature (deg C)
Compressed Air Temperature (deg C)
Natural Gas Temperature (deg C)
Steam Temperature (deg C)
Ambient Temperature Celsius
Temperature Celsius

Weather Temperature Fahrenheit

Water Temperature (deg F)
Water Temperature Supply (deg F)
Water Temperature Return (deg F)
Water Temperature Mixed (deg F)
Air Temperature (deg F)
Air Temperature Return (deg F)
°F
Air Temperature Supply (deg F)
Steam Temperature (deg F)
Compressed Air Temperature (deg F)
Natural Gas Temperature (deg F)
Steam Temperature (deg F)
Ambient Temperature Fahrenheit
Temperature Fahrenheit

Temperature Diff

Weather Temperature Differential (deg C)

Water Temperature Differential (deg C)
Water Temperature Supply Differential
(deg C)
Water Temperature Return Differential
(deg C)
Δ°C
Water Temperature Mixed Differential
(deg C)
Air Temperature Differential (deg C)
Steam Temperature Differential (deg C)
Temperature Differential (deg C)
Ambient Temperature Differential (deg C)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 149

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

ΔK

Weather Temperature Differential (deg F)

Water Temperature Differential (deg F)
Water Temperature Supply Differential
(deg F)
Water Temperature Return Differential
(deg F)
Δ°F
Water Temperature Mixed Differential
(deg F)
Air Temperature Differential (deg F)
Steam Temperature Differential (deg F)
Temperature Differential (deg F)
Ambient Temperature Differential (deg F)

Temperature Rate of Change

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change

(deg C/min)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min)
°C/min
Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/min)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg C/min)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/min

K/min

150 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/min)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°F/min (deg F/min)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/min)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg F/min)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/min)
Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/h)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/h)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°C/h (deg C/h)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
C/h)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg C/h)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg C/h)

K/h

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 151

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Temperature Mixed Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Air Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/h)
Air Temperature Return Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Air Temperature Supply Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Ambient Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/h)
Steam Temperature Rate of Change
°F/h (deg F/h)
Temperature Rate of Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Mixed Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Rate of Change (deg
F/h)
Water Temperature Return Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Water Temperature Supply Rate of
Change (deg F/h)
Weather Temperature Rate of Change
(deg F/h)

Thermal Conductance

W/(m²·K)

Thermal Conductivity

Air Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))

Water Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))
W/(m²·K/m) Steam Thermal Conductivity (W/(m K))
Natural Gas Thermal Conductivity (W/(m
K))
Air Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Water Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Btu/(h·ft²·F/ft)
Steam Thermal Conductivity (BTU 59/(h ft
deg F))
Natural Gas Thermal Conductivity (BTU
59/(h ft deg F))

Thermal Linear Expansion

m/C

in/F

ft/F

Thermal Pressure

psi/oF

Thermal Volume Expansion

m³/C

in³/F

ft³/F

Thermoelectric Power

V/K

152 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Time

year

month

week

day

min

Time Accuracy

s/h

Torque

Nm

lbf·in

lbf·ft

Turbidity

NTU

Velocity

m/s Air Velocity (m/s)

m/h Air Velocity (m/h)

mile/h Air Velocity (mile/h)

ft/s Air Velocity (ft/s)

ft/min Air Velocity (ft/min)

m/min Air Velocity (m/min)

Velocity Angular

radians per second rad/s

revolutions per minute RPM

Voltage

Average Voltage Line-to-Neutral

Voltage Phases AB
Voltage Phases BC
V Voltage Phases CA
Voltage Phases AN
Voltage Phases BN
Voltage Phases CN

Volume

Air Volume (m^3)

Steam Volume (m^3)
m³ Wastewater Volume (m^3)
Water Volume (m^3)
Natural Gas Volume (m^3)

in³

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 153

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Descriptive Name Unit Name Unit Symbol Suggested Mappings

Air Volume (cubft)
Steam Volume (cf)
ft³ Wastewater Volume (cf)
Water Volume (cf)
Gas Volume (cf)
Wastewater Volume (gal)
Usgal
Water Volume (gal)
Wastewater Volume (L)
litre
Water Volume (L)

154 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Configuring the PME EWS server for HTTPS

By default, the EWS server in PME is configured for HTTP client connections.

To configure the EWS server for HTTPS client connections:

1. On the PME server, open the web.config file for editing, for example in Notepad. You can
find this file in ...\Power Monitoring Expert\applications\EWS.

2. Search for the <binding name="DataExchange_BP11Binding"> element in the file.

Find the <httpTransport ... /> child element and change it to <httpsTransport
... />.

3. Search for the <behavior name="DataExchange_BP11Behavior"> element in the file.

Find the <serviceMetadata httpGetEnabled="true" /> child element and add the
httpsGetEnabled="true" attribute. After the change the element should look like this:
<serviceMetadata httpGetEnabled="true" httpsGetEnabled="true"/>.

4. Save the web.config file. Close the file.

5. Restart Internet Information Services (IIS) on this computer.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 155

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Configuring the PME EWS server regional setting

By default, the EWS regional setting in PME is set to use the PME system culture.

NOTE: For system to system data exchange using EWS, set the regional setting to INVARIANT.

To configure the EWS server regional setting:

1. On the PME server, open the web.config file for editing, for example in Notepad. You can
find this file in ...\Power Monitoring Expert\applications\EWS.

2. Search for the <add key="RegionalSetting" value="" /> element in the file.

3. Set the value property to a valid regional setting (for example en-US, en-CA, fr-FR, de-DE,
and so on), or to INVARIANT.

4. Save the web.config file.

5. Close the file.

6. Restart Internet Information Services (IIS) on this computer.

156 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Database growth calculations

Factory default measurement logging
A measurement record in the database uses approximately 75 bytes of disk space. Based on the
factory default data logging configurations, we can calculate the database growth for data logged
from different device types.

Example

Daily Growth Number of Total Daily Total Annual 

Device Type
Rate (kB) Devices Growth (MB) Growth (GB)
ION7650 780 10 7.62 2.72
PM8000 950 20 19.00 6.94
PM3200 85 70 5.81 2.07
TOTAL - 100 32.43 MB 11.84 GB

NOTE: Use the Database Growth Calculator tool to estimate the database growth for your
system. The tool is available through the Exchange Community. See Resources for link
information.

Custom measurement logging

Custom measurement logging can be configured in the monitoring devices and, as software based
logging, in PME. A measurement record in the database uses approximately 75 bytes of disk
space.

The following shows the database growth estimate for logging of a single measurement every 15
minutes:

NOTE: Use the Database Growth Calculator tool to estimate the database growth for your
system. The tool is available through the Exchange Community. See Resources for link
information.

Power quality event logging

Power quality (PQ) events and waveform capture recording is event driven, which makes it
impossible to accurately predict their impact on database growth. In our experience, power quality
data accounts for approximately 10% - 20% of the total database size.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 157

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

NOTE: Use the Database Growth Calculator tool to estimate the database growth for your
system. The tool is available through the Exchange Community. See Resources for link
information.

158 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Default device type support

The following tables list the pre-configured device types in PME 2021 and the license that is
required for each type:

NOTE: The license types (E, M, S) are for locales (countries other than the US, Canada, and
India) where individual licenses are sold. For locales (the US, Canada, India) where license
bundles are sold, a device license is valid for any device type.

NOTE: Drivers created with the Device Type Editor require mid-range (M) type device licenses.

E = Entry-Range Device License

M = Mid-Range Device License
S = High-End Device License

Device Type License

9410 M
9810 S
3300 ACM E
3710 ACM S
3720 ACM S
3800 RTU M
ACCESS 9200 E
ACCESS 9200 (MODBUS) E
ACCESS 9300 E
ACCESS 9330 M
ACCESS 9340 M
ACCESS 9350 M
ACCESS 9360 M
ACCESS 9500 M
ACCESS 9500 RTU M
ACCESS 9510 M
ACCESS 9510 RTU M
ACCESS 9600 S
ACCESS 9610 S
ACCESS 9700 S
AccuSine PCS M
AccuSine PCS Plus S
AccuSine PCSn S

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 159

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Device Type License

AccuSine PFV Plus S
Acti 9 Active E
Acti 9 Smartlink E
Acti 9 Smartlink Ethernet E
Altivar 61 E
ASCO 7000/4000 S
BCPM [license multiplier =
M
0.5] (*)
BCPM Flex Cct [license
M
multiplier = 0.5] (*)
CL110/TH110 [license
M
multiplier = 0.05] (*)
CM100-200 E
CM2000 Series M
CM3000 Series M
CM4000 Series S
CMS460 M
ComX (WAGES) E
DM2000 E
DM6200 E
DM6200 H E
DM6300 E
Easergy P3 S
Easergy P5 S
EDS151 E
EDS461 M
EM1000 Series E
EM3460 E
EM3550 E
EM3555 E
EM4200 E
EM4300 Series E
EM4800-08 Delta M
EM4800-08 Wye M
EM4800-12 M

160 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Device Type License

EM4800-24 M
EM4900 M
EM4900 Logical Meter
S
[license multiplier = 0.01] (*)
EM5600 M
EM6400 E
EM6400 NG E
EM6430 E
EM6433 E
EM6433_36_38 H E
EM6434 E
EM6436 E
EM6436 Dual E
EM6438 E
EM6459 E
EM6459 H E
EM7000 Series E
Enercept Meter E
EnerSure BCPM xD M
EnerSure iBCPM xD M
Exertherm ARM XL M
Galaxy VM E
Galaxy VS E
Galaxy VX E
HDPM6000 S
HDPM6000B S
HDPM6000R S
HDPM6000S S
iEM2050/2055/2250 E
iEM2150/2155 E
iEM3x50 Series E
iEM3x55 Series E
IG6 E
ION 6200 E

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 161

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Device Type License

ION 6200 (MODBUS) E
ION 7300 E
ION 7330 M
ION 7350 M
ION 7400 S
ION 7500 M
ION 7500 RTU M
ION 7550 M
ION 7550 RTU M
ION 7600 S
ION 7650 S
ION 7700 S
ION 8300 M
ION 8400 S
ION 8500 S
ION 8600 S
ION 8600C M
ION 8650 S
ION 8650C M
ION 8800 S
ION 8800C M
ION 9000 S
LVSMC E
MGE Galaxy 5000 Series M
MGE-UPS E
Micrologic
M
2.0/3.0/5.0/6.0/7.0 X/Xi
Micrologic 2.0/5.0/6.0 E E
Micrologic 2.0/5.0/6.0 E
E
IFE_IFM
Micrologic 2.0/5.0/6.0/7.0 A E
Micrologic 2.0/5.0/6.0/7.0 A
E
IFE_IFM
Micrologic 5.0/6.0/7.0 H M

162 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Device Type License

Micrologic 5.0/6.0/7.0 H
M
IFE_IFM
Micrologic 5.0/6.0/7.0 P E
Micrologic 5.0/6.0/7.0 P
E
IFE_IFM
Micrologic 5.2/6.2/5.3/6.3 A E
Micrologic
E
5.2/6.2/5.3/6.3/7.2/7.3 E
Momentum PLC A8
M
(WAGES)
Momentum PLC D10
M
(WAGES)
Momentum PLC D16
M
(EPSS)
PM1120_30 H E
PM1200 E
PM200 Series E
PM2000 Series E
PM3250 E
PM3255 E
PM5100 Series E
PM5300 Series M
PM5350 E
PM5350 IB/PB E
PM5500/5600/5700 non-PQ M
PM5600/5700 PQ S
PM600 Series E
PM700 Series E
PM800 Series M
PM8000 S
PM810 LE E
PM9C E
PowerTag 63A /
PowerLogic Tag QO & EDB M
[license multiplier = 0.05] (*)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 163

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Device Type License

PowerTag NSX
E
M250/M630
PowerTag Rope & F160 /
E
PowerLogic Tag Rope
Sepam Series 10 E
Sepam Series 20 E
Sepam Series 40 M
Sepam Series 48 M
Sepam Series 60 S
Sepam Series 80 S
SER 2408 M
SER 3200 M
SMD LV Thermal Monitor M
Switchgear Monitoring
M
Device
SymmetraMW M
Tesys T E
Twido Modular PLC
E
(WAGES) D12/28/44
Varlogic_NRC_12 E
VarPlus Logic E
Veeder Root M
Vigilohm IFL12 E
Vigilohm IM20H E
Vigilohm IM400 E
WT4000 Series E
ZBRN32 (CL110/TH110) M

(*) The license multiplier indicates the fraction of a license each device of this type uses. For
example, a multiplier of 0.01 means that 100 devices of this type can share one full license.

NOTE: PME assigns a higher range license to a device, if an appropriate lower range license is not
available. For example, if a system has a ION7350 device, which requires a Mid-Range license,
PME will assign a free High-End license to this device, if a Mid-Range license is not available.

164 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Deploying and configuring a Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar

graphic component
You can create and deploy a Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar graphic component in the Graphics
Editor, and then bind and view the graphic object in Building Operation Workstation.

To create the graphic component:

1. Navigate to:
<Extract path>\EBO Integration Files\Graphics Editor\Components\
and double-click the " PME- Generic Components" file. The new thermometer graphic
component is added to the Building Operation Graphics Editor library.

2. Open the Building Operation Graphics Editor.

3. From the PME– Generic Components category at the left, drag the Power Measurement
Display Bar component onto a new page. The Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar component
appears.

4. Select the component. In the Properties pane at the lower right, change the parameter settings
as needed (name, min/max, setpoint values, and so on). Make sure that the settings make
logical sense (for example, all setpoints are within the min/max range and in the following
order: SP4>SP3>SP2>SP1).

5. Save the new graphic component page as a .tgml file.

To deploy the graphic component:

1. Log in to Building Operation Workstation.

2. In the System Tree, select a Server, and then choose File > New > Graphic, enter a name for
the file, and click Create. The new graphic file name appears in the System Tree.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 165

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. In the System Tree, right-click the graphic file name and select Properties.

4. In the Basic tab, click the button next to the File field and navigate to the .tgml file, select the
file, click Open and then OK. The Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar now appears in the Building
Operation Workstation.

5. In the System Tree, select the Server, and then choose New > Value. The Create Object
dialog appears. Repeat the above steps four times to create four new values.

6. Select Analog Value and complete the fields for Name, Location, and Description as needed,
and then click Create for each new value. The four new Analog Values now appear.

7. For each value, double-click the name after adding it. Click the up or down arrows to select a
number, and then click the Value button to select Forced or Force value for the object. Click
Yes to save the object.

8. To bind the graphic object to the value you just created, in the System Tree, right-click the
graphic file name and select Properties.

9. In the Bindings tab, enter the location of the graphic object in the object value field and click
OK. The Multi-input Setpoint Display Bar now shows the preset setpoint values and bound
values. The reading bar height and color change accordingly.

To verify the bind of the graphic component:

166 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

1. In the System Tree, right-click on the new graphic file name and click Edit. The Graphics
Editor opens.

2. Revise some graphic component parameters (for example, min/max, setpoint values, or
colors), save the file, and return to Building Operation Workstation. Your changes appear on
the Graphics page in Building Operation Workstation.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 167

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Deploying and configuring a Single-input Thermometer graphic

component
You can create and deploy a Single-input Thermometer graphic component in the Graphics Editor,
and then bind and view the graphic object in Building Operation Workstation.

To create the graphic component:

1. Navigate to:
<Extract path>\EBO Integration Files\Graphics Editor\Components\
and double-click the "PME- Generic Components" file. The new thermometer graphic
component is added to the Building Operation Graphics Editor library.

2. Open the Building Operation Graphics Editor.

3. From the PME– Generic Components category at the left, drag the Setpoint Display Bar
component onto a new page. The Single-input Thermometer bar component appears.

4. Select the component. In the Properties pane at the lower right, change the parameter settings
as needed (name, min/max, setpoint values, and so on). Make sure that the settings make
logical sense (for example, all setpoints are within the min/max range and in the following
order: SP4>SP3>SP2>SP1).

5. Save the new graphic component page as a .tgml file.

To deploy the graphic component:

1. Log in to Building Operation Workstation.

2. In the System Tree, select a Server, and then choose File > New > Graphic, enter a name for
the file, and click Create. The new graphic file name appears in the System Tree.

168 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

3. In the System Tree, right-click the graphic file name and select Properties.

4. In the Basic tab, click the button next to the File field and navigate to the .tgml file, select the
file, click Open and then OK. The Single-input Thermometer bar now appears in the Building
Operation Workstation.

5. In the System Tree, select the Server, and then choose New > Value. The Create Object
dialog appears.

6. Select Analog Value and complete the fields for Name, Location, and Description as needed,
and then click Create. The Analog Value now appears.

7. Double-click the value name after adding it. Click the up or down arrows to select a number,
and then click the Value button to select Forced or Force value for the object. Click Yes to
save the object.

8. To bind the graphic object to the value you just created, in the System Tree, right-click the
graphic file name and select Properties.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 169

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

9. In the Bindings tab, enter the location of the graphic object in the object value field and click
OK. The Single-input Thermometer bar now shows the preset setpoint values and bound
values. The reading bar height and color change accordingly.

To verify the bind of the graphic component:

1. In the System Tree, right-click on the new graphic file name and click Edit. The Graphics
Editor opens.

2. Revise some graphic component parameters (for example, min/max, setpoint values, or
colors), save the file, and return to Building Operation Workstation. Your changes appear on
the Graphics page in Building Operation Workstation.

170 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Exposing custom device driver measurements through EWS

If you create a custom device driver in PME using the Device Type Editor tool, you need to take
extra steps to expose the measurements from this device through EWS. The default device drivers
in PME and many of the downloadable add-on drivers have their measurements exposed by default.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To expose custom measurements from a custom device type through EWS:

1. Create a DTE driver. In this example, a driver file was created for “My_DTE” device with two
registers, “My_Label_1” and “My_Label_2”.

2. Go in the following folder: C:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Power

Monitoring Expert\system\WebServices\Extensions.

3. Select any XML file (for example: “Types_Measurements_8000.xml”), copy and paste it to the
same folder. Rename it to the newly created DTE "Device Type" name, “My_DTE.xml”

4. Open the XML file with a file editor. The structure of the XML resembles the following:

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<MeasurementStores xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-
instance" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"> <Store
Name="8000" DisplayName="PM8000" Type="8000" SubType="Common">
...
...
<Measurement IONReferenceName="Active Energy Delivered"
MeasurementName="Real Energy Into the Load" MeasurementUnit="kWh"
Exposed="true" IsManual="false" Handle="22704" Format="double" />
<Measurement IONReferenceName="Active Energy Delivered Interval"
MeasurementName="Real Energy Into the Load Interval"
MeasurementUnit="kWh" Exposed="false" IsManual="false"
Handle="24483" Format="double" />
...
...
</Store>
</MeasurementStores>

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 171

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

5. Modify the bold sections like the following to match your "Device Type" name as well as your
Register "Label". Make sure to change all the bold ones to what fits the new DTE, delete the
"Handle" section and specify the format as necessary.

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<MeasurementStores xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-
instance" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"> <Store
Name="My_DTE" DisplayName="My_DTE" Type="My_DTE" SubType="Common">
...
...
<Measurement IONReferenceName="My_Label_1" MeasurementName="My_
Label_1" MeasurementUnit="My_Unit_1" Exposed="true"
IsManual="false" Format="Boolean" /> <Measurement
IONReferenceName="My_Label_2" MeasurementName="My_Label_2"
MeasurementUnit="My_Unit_2" Exposed="true" IsManual="false"
Format="double" />
...
...
</Store>
</MeasurementStores>

NOTE: When editing the XML file, format “Boolean” should be used for all Boolean values
and format “Double” for all analog values.

6. After completing the new xml file, go to Management Console > Tools > System and click
Update EWS Server. It will take some time for the server to propagate the change via web
service. An IIS and/or computer restart might even be required.

7. The custom registers/measurements are now expose via EWS. See Hosting EWS values in
Building Operation for information on this topic.

172 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Manual integration steps without using the web application

Integration Utility settings
This section describes how to manually integrate Building Operation and PME without using the
web application Integration Utility settings. Sometimes manual steps are more convenient for
certain tasks, for example: making minor changes to the system.

NOTE: The manual steps cannot fully replace the web application Integration Utility settings for an
PME/EBO Integration deployment. When deploying the PME/EBO Integration, you must use the
web application Integration Utility settings to create the Diagram links.

The following manual steps are described in this section:

• Creating PME users for Building Operation

• Creating Diagrams, Reports, and Dashboards links in Building Operation

• Hosting EWS values in Building Operation

Creating PME users for Building Operation

You need to create two different PME users for the integration with Building Operation:

1. A user for the EWS connection between the two applications.

2. A user for the Building Operation connection to the PME Web applications (Dashboards and
Reports).

For information on how to create the EWS user, see Setting up EWS credentials.

For information on how to create the user to access the Web Applications, see "Adding a standard
user" in the EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide or the PME Web Applications
Help.

Creating Diagrams, Reports, and Dashboards links in Building Operation

Create links to the PME Diagrams, Reports, and Dashboards applications in Building Operation

To create links in Building Operation:

1. On the PME database server, open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.

2. Run the following SQL script to enable the multi-use token:

EXEC
ApplicationModules.Configuration.WriteConfigurationValue 'Web
Framework','Server','MultiUseTokenEnabled',NULL,'true',
'GlobalSetting'

3. After the authentication is enabled, use a web browser to navigate to:

https://<YourServerName>/Web/MUT.

4. Provide supervisor-level login information in the dialog and click OK. This opens the Generate
Authentication URL page.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 173

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

5. In Generate Authentication URL, enter the appropriate information.

Automatic Authentication: Provide the PME account login for an Operator level user
account in the User name and Password fields.

Windows Authentication: Use the current Windows user account as a login. You must add
this Windows user to PME. See User Manager for details on how to add a user in PME.

Destination URL Type: Leave the default settings.

Destination Protocol: Choose HTTP or HTTPS.

Destination Host Name: Enter the PME server name here. Use the fully-qualified server
domain name.

Destination URL:
/Web for the PMEWeb Applications Settings page.
/Dashboard for the PME Dashboards page.
/Reporter for the PME Web Reports page.

6. Click Generate URL. The URL will appear in the Authentication URL box.

7. Log into Building Operation.

8. In Building Operation Workstation, create a new hyperlink for the URL generated in step 6
above.

9. Repeat steps 3 - 7 for each of the web applications.

Hosting EWS values in Building Operation

In order to integrate values from PME with Building Operation, you must:

1. Create the EWS interface in Building Operation Workstation.

2. Host the PME values for that interface.

Configuring the EWS Server

Before you create an EWS interface in Building Operation Workstation, you must first enable the
EWS service. (The EWS service is disabled by default in PME.)

To enable the EWS service:

1. Navigate to ...\“Power Monitoring Expert Folder”\ Applications\EWS\

2. Open Web.Config in a text editor, such as Notepad.

174 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

3. Search for <add key="EWSEnabled" value="0" /> and change the value from "0" to
"1". (Conversely, to disable the EWS service, change the value from "1" to "0".)

4. Search for <add key="RealTimeRefreshRate" value="20" /> and make sure the
value is set to "20".

5. Save and close >Web.config. The EWS service is now enabled and with the correct refresh
rate. (The service can be enabled or disabled at any time by editing the Web.config file.)

Updating the EWS server

To update the EWS server in PME:

NOTE: Run Management Console as Administrator user. To do this, right-click the Management
Console program icon and select Run as administrator from the context menu. If you do not run
it as Administrator, then certain tools such as Update EWS Server are not functional.

1. Open Management Console.

2. Select Tools > System > Update EWS Server. A dialog box appears, indicating that the
update to EWS server configuration is successful.

3. Click OK.

NOTE: For any changes in the PME Management Console, such as adding a new device or
renaming an existing device, you must 1) update the EWS server, and 2) regenerate a Vista
Diagram before using the Integration Utility.

Modifying which measurements EWS Server exposes by default

NOTE: The following step is optional, however, it becomes necessary if you want to change the
list of measurements that the EWS server exposes by default.

The EWS Server relies on two control files to define which devices are exposed and which
measurements are exposed for those devices.

• The following file contains the list of all PME devices:

...\<Power Monitoring Expert
Folder>\config\WebServices\Devices.Measurements.xml

If you do not want a device to be exposed, delete the complete line of an entry.

• The following file contains the list of measurement exposed for all supported devices types:
...\<Power Monitoring Expert
Folder>\config\WebServices\Types.Measurements.xml

To expose or un-expose a specific measurement for a specific device type, do the following:
a. Browse to that specific device type.

b. Identify the measurement you wish to expose.

c. Set the “Exposed” parameter to “true” to expose or "false" to un-expose.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 175

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

d. Set the “IsManual” parameter to “true”.

If you do not set “IsManual” to true, the next time you run Update EWS Server from the
Management Console, your configuration will be overwritten by the system default.

e. When you finish, select Tools > System > Update EWS Server to make the changes.

Creating and hosting the EWS interface in Building Operation Workstation

You can manually create the EWS interface in Building Operation Workstation and then host PME
values so that you can browse those values from within Building Operation Workstation.

To manually create a new EWS web service interface:

1. Log in to Building Operation.

2. In the System Tree, right-click on Server, and then click New > Interface.

The Create Object: EcoStruxure Web Service dialog appears.

176 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

3. Enter a name and description for the new web interface in the respective fields and click Next.
The Connection Information dialog appears.

4. Enter the server name or the IP address where PME is hosted in the EWS Server field.

5. Leave unchanged the values for Protocol and EWS Communication Port.

6. Enter EWS/DataExchange.svc?wsdl in the EWS Path field.

7. Enter the same User name and Password that you created for EWS.

8. Click Create. The new web service now appears in the System Tree. Next, proceed to host
the new web service.

To manually host the new EWS web service:

1. In the System Tree, navigate to and expand the Hardware folder.

2. Expand, and then select the newly-created interface for which you want to host values.

3. Right-click Root or any underlying level/devices and choose Host EWS Objects. The Select
EWS Interface dialog appears.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 177

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

4. Choose the appropriate interface location, and then click Select.

Depending on the number of devices and measurements, this task can take up to an hour.

Repeat this step for any item you want to host.

The web service is now hosted and appears in the System Tree.

5. After the hosting completes, click the new EWS web service and browse the values in the List
View tab at the right.

To add additional columns of values in the List View tab:

1. In the List View tab, right-click on the Name/Description heading and select Add/Remove
columns.

2. Select the check box next to any column type you want to add to the List View, and then click
OK. The new column types and their respective values now appear in the List View tab.

NOTE: If you find that some measurements for a device are missing from the list of
measurements, do the following:
Check to make sure that all of the measurements you want for that device are exposed; refer to
“Modifying which measurements EWS Server exposes by default”.
If all of the measurements you want for the device are exposed but still do not appear in the list of
measurements, and then you will need to repeat the procedure to create and host the EWS
interface. (PME takes some time between enabling the EWS server and when the EWS client
shows the exposed measurements.) See “Creating and hosting the EWS interface in Building
Operation Workstation”.

NOTE: If you find that EWS measurements are displayed in an incorrect format, check and edit
the EWS regional setting. See Configuring the PME EWS server regional setting for more
information.

178 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Configuring Alarms
1. Log in to Building Operation.

2. Alarms for Architecture 2 are automatically enabled after they are imported and can be viewed
along with all other alarms within the Alarms pane at the bottom of the dialog.

3. To configure the alarms associated with the devices for the EWS Client, in the System Tree,

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 179

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

right click on EWS Client and select Properties. The EWS Client dialog appears.

4. Complete the various fields and select the options you want on this dialog, and then click OK.
The system saves your configuration changes.

The Building Operation “Sum Alarm” is an ideal way to leverage alarms flowing from EWS. It allows
the users to create actions and notifications on filtered PME alarms. Refer to the EcoStruxure
Building Operation System Reference Guide for more information.

180 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

PME IP Ports
The following table lists the ports used by PME for the communication between its components and
the connected devices:

Port Protocol Location Function Configurable

20/21 FTP Power Meter Power meter access No

23 Telnet Power Meter Power meter access No

25 SMTP Power Meter Power meter access No

69 TFTP Power Meter Power meter access No

(1) PME Server (1) IIS server, EWS (1) Yes

80 HTTP
(2) Power Meter (2) Power meter access (2) No

135 OPC PME Server OPC client No

139/445 NetBIOS/SMB PME Server Engineering client (File and Printer Sharing) No

(1) PME Server (1) IIS Server, EWS, Cloud Agent

443 HTTPS No
(2) Power Meter (2) Power meter access

502 Modbus TCP Power Meter Power meter communication No

1433 TCP Database Server SQL Server instance No

1434 UDP Database Server SQL Server Browser No

3721 PML Power Meter Power meter communication No

6000-6099 TCP PME Server Log Inserter No

7070 TCP PME Server Licensing Yes

7176 TCP PME Server Diagnostics Viewer (LogSubsystem.Service.exe) No

7700 ION Power Meter Power meter communication No

7701 Modbus RTU Power Meter Power meter communications No

7800 Modbus/ION/PML Gateway Ethergate (All meter COM ports) No

7801 Modbus/ION/PML Gateway Ethergate (Meter COM1) No

7802 Modbus/ION/PML Gateway Ethergate (Meter COM2 and COM 4) No

7803 Modbus/ION/PML Gateway Ethergate (Meter COM3) No

8090 TCP PME Server Web client browser Yes

8523 TCP PME Server Logical devices (LogicalDevice.AutoConfig.ServiceHost.exe) Yes

13666 TCP PME Server PMLNetman.exe No

13667 TCP PME Server Diagnostics Viewer (Server access from client machine) No

13668 TCP PME Server Secondary server No

13666
13670 TCP PME Server Services (Vista and Designer access from client machines) No
13671

23102 TCP PME Server Application Modules web services No

(1) Real-time data service (to send data to clients)

57777 TCP PME Server Yes
(2) SQL Server (for default instance)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 181

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Port Protocol Location Function Configurable

57778 TCP PME Server DataProcessorService.exe Yes

57779 TCP PME Server Diagnostics Viewer (Alarm Service) Yes

57780 TCP PME Server Diagnostics Viewer (Log Subsystem) Yes

57781 TCP PME Server Diagnostics Viewer (Cloud Agent) Yes

182 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Setting SQL Server memory options

Note the following recommendations for setting SQLServer memory options on the server where
you install SQL Server:

• Do not set the SQL Server maximum memory to less than 1GB.

• Where only SQL Server is running on the host server, set the SQL Server maximum memory at
the system physical memory less at least 2GB for the Windows operating system. For
example, if your server has 8GB of memory, set the SQL Server maximum memory to no more
than 6GB. This leaves at least 2GB for the operating system.

• Where the SQL Server is sharing the host server with other server processes, including Internet
Information Services (IIS) and ION services, set the SQL Server maximum memory to no more
than half the physical memory on the server. For example, if your server has 8GB of memory,
set the SQL Server memory to no more than 4GB. This leaves at least 4GB for the operating
system and all other server processes.

In addition to setting the maximum memory option, consult with your site administrator to determine
whether or not to enable the Lock pages in memory permission setting in Windows for the SQL
service account on all SQL Server instances.

NOTICE
LOSS OF DATA
Back up or archive any SQL Server database data before adjusting any database memory
options.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in irreversible database changes.

Only personnel with advanced knowledge of SQL Server databases should make database
parameter changes.

To set the maximum memory setting for your SQL Server:

1. Start SQL Server Management Studio and log in to your SQL Server instance.

2. Right-click the SQL Server name and click Properties in the menu to open the Server
Properties dialog.

3. Select Memory in the left pane and adjust the value in the Maximum server memory field.

4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog.

5. Close SQL Server Management Studio.

A server reboot or a restart of the SQL Server service is not required.

To enable the lock pages in memory option:

1. Click Start > Run and type gpedit.msc in the Run dialog to open the Local Group Policy
Editor.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 183

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

2. In the left pane, navigate to Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Security
Settings > Local Policies.

3. Expand Local Policies and select User Rights Assignment.

The policies are listed in the right pane.

4. Locate Lock pages in memory in the list and then double click the policy name to open the
Lock pages in memory Properties dialog.

5. Click Add User or Group on the Local Security Setting tab.

6. Add an account with the privileges to run sqlserver.exe and then click OK to close the dialog.

7. Click OK to close the Local Group Policy Editor.

A server reboot or a restart of the SQL Server service is not required.

184 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Terms and definitions

Activation ID: Each license definition has one or more features included in a specific license type.
An activation ID allows you to license the features included in that license type. Only one Activation
ID can be activated in the License Configuration Tool at a time.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): The primary organization for the development of
technology standards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groups and is the U.S.
member of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

EcoStruxure Building Operation: An integration platform for monitoring, control, and

management of energy, lighting, fire safety, security and HVAC of buildings.

Entitlement ID: A new entitlement is generated for each Purchase Order. The entitlement is sent
by email and includes the Activation ID.

HTTP: This protocol is not secure and is subject to “man-in-the-middle” and eavesdropping attacks
that can allow attackers to gain access to website accounts and sensitive information.

HTTPS: This protocol provides secure communication over a computer network, with especially
wide deployment on the Internet. It results from layering the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) on
top of the SSL/TLS protocol, thus adding the security capabilities of SSL/TLS to standard HTTP
communications. HTTPS provides authentication of the website and associated web server with
which one is communicating and thereby protects against “man-in-the-middle” attacks. Additionally,
HTTPS provides bidirectional encryption of communications between a client and server. HTTPS
creates a secure channel over insecure, unencrypted networks, such as Wi-Fi networks. HTTPS is
designed to withstand attacks and is considered secure against attacks (with the exception of older
deprecated versions of SSL). The encryption within HTTPS is intended to provide benefits like
confidentiality, integrity and identity. Your information remains confidential because only your
browser and your server can decrypt the traffic. Integrity protects the data from being modified
without your knowledge.

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): The primary organization for the development
of International Standards and Conformity Assessment for all electrical, electronic and related
technologies.

License Configuration Tool: All Power Monitoring Expert licenses are activated here. The
License Configuration Tool will also indicate the current state of trial and purchased licenses.

License Portal: The web portal hosted by Schneider Electric (https://schneider-

electric.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal/logon.do) where the licenses are registered
during activation. During an on-line activation, the License Configuration Tool will connect to the
portal automatically. However, during an off-line activation, the user will need to connect to the
portal from an alternate PC or a smart phone.

License Returns: Once activated, a license is “locked” to its host computer (physical or virtual),
and therefore can only be activated on one machine at a time. Returning the license simply means
reversing the activation process that is, “unlocking” the license from its host, thereby making it
available to be activated again, either on another host or the same host.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 185

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Management Console “About” Box: This is the first place to check to help ensure that the
licensing components are functioning correctly. It will indicate which modules are licensed or made
available through the Trial.

Power Monitoring Expert: A power management software solution for energy suppliers and
consumers. It allows you to manage energy information from metering and control devices installed
in your facility or other remote locations. The product offers control capabilities and comprehensive
power quality and reliability analysis to help you reduce energy-related costs.

186 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Time synchronization for ION meters

You can synchronize the internal clocks of all networked PowerLogic™ ION™ meters and devices
through the Management Console component of Power Monitoring Expert. When they are
synchronized, all data logs have time stamps that are relative to a uniform time base.

NOTE: This information is specific to ION devices. It is not applicable to devices that are not
based on ION architecture.

Time synchronization signals are broadcast periodically over the network; each meter continually
assesses its ability to remain synchronized with the incoming broadcasts. Over a brief period, each
meter learns how its internal timing differs from that of the broadcast source and adjusts its
timekeeping to compensate. Very accurate time synchronization is achieved with this method.

Meters at modem sites are synchronized each time they are connected. The longer the duration
between connections, the larger the error in time synchronization. In the extreme case, this can
result in missing or duplicated logs. If this occurs, you can increase the frequency of connections
through the Power Monitoring Expert software connection.

NOTE: This information assumes that you are using the time synchronization function in Power
Monitoring Expert. Although other methods of time synchronization are available, such as with
ION Setup, a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server, a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver,
or 3rd party protocols, it is important that you use only one method of time synchronization on each
network. If you use multiple methods, the timestamps will differ for the sites and devices that are
using separate time synchronizing methods.

Before you configure time synchronization on your network, you should familiarize yourself with the
Clock module settings. Once you have done this, you can decide which synchronization method
you want to use.

Enabling and configuring time synchronization

Time synchronization in Power Monitoring Expert is initially disabled and needs to be enabled and
configured through Management Console. The communications port and protocol used for
communications between the software and the networked ION devices is automatically used to
send time synchronization signals to all connected ION devices. The software sends a time sync
packet and the time is set when the packet is received.

When reviewing time synchronization messages in the system log, remember that the time in the
message is not the time to which the meter was time synced, but rather it is the time the message
was posted to the system log. The message is posted after the meter is time synced.

Note that ION time synchronization only uses the UTC setting; the LOCAL setting cannot be used.

Time synchronization values are set when sites or Ethernet devices are defined in a Power
Monitoring Expert network. Enable time synchronization or set custom intervals for supported
devices in any site through Management Console as follows:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 187

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

1. Start Management Console.

2. Select Sites or Devices on the System Setup pane:

Select Sites if you want to customize a particular serial, modem, or Ethernet Gateway
site.

Select Devices if you want to customize an individual Ethernet device.

3. Right-click the device or site and select Configure Device or Configure Site to open the
related configuration dialog.

4. Right-click inside the dialog and select Advanced Properties.

5. Configure the Time Synch ION Enabled or Time Synch Ethernet Enabled, and Time
Synch Interval Ethernet fields as required for your system.

6. Click OK to save you changes.

The default time synchronization interval of 3600 seconds (displayed in milliseconds) is

acceptable in most software installations.

NOTE: You need appropriate permissions to configure meters on your network. Refer to the ION
System Security technical note for details on software and meter security.

Using Table gadget in Slideshow

When you use the table gadget in slideshow, the slideshow in the new browser does not retrieve the
real-time data from devices in the system. To retrieve the real-time data, perform the following:

1. Open a new tab in the browser.

2. Login to the PME web application.

3. Refresh the slideshow page in the browser.

The table gadget slideshow displays the real-time data from devices in the system.

NOTE: The session timeout of the PME web application is enabled by default (See Session
Timeout for more information). After the timeout period, the slideshow display does not retrieve the
real-time data. You must login to the PME web application every time after the timeout period.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

• Configuring a slideshow

• Playing a Slideshow

• Session Timeout

188 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Web Applications settings

TIP: You can open the Settings page from the SETTINGS link in the Web Applications banner.

Use the Settings page to access web application settings and configuration tools.

NOTE: Access to this application or function is controlled by user privileges. See Default User
Access Level Privileges in Web Applications help, and Customizing Access Level Privileges
in User Manager help for details.

TIP: Use Search, in the Settings Library, to find the settings and tools you are looking for based on
keywords.

The Settings page consists of a Settings Library and a configuration area. The Settings Library
provides access to the following settings and tools:

Category Settings/Tools
Personal Preferences
Report Theme
Personalization
System Language
System Theme
Diagnostics and Usage
Registration & Analytics
Registration
Diagrams Control Options
Security Login Options
Session Timeout
Integrations (Note: This
Authorized Hosts
setting is a sub category
Integration Utility
under Security.)
Billing Rates (tool)
Device Manager (tool)
System Hierarchies (tool)
Modeling (tool)
System Log (tool)
Users User Manager (tool)

NOTE: The availability of the Billing Rates (Rate Editor) and Modeling are subject to licensing.
EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) appears in the Settings pane only if it is enabled in the system.

NOTE: You can customize the web application navigation links (Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends,
and so on) in the banner. For example, you can add custom links, hide/unhide/delete links, and re-
order links. For details see Customizing the Web Applications links

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 189

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Personal Preferences
Use the personal preferences settings to update or edit your user profile details, change your
account password, set your personal localization preferences, and choose your personal theme
color.

NOTE: Your personal localization settings overrule the system localization settings for your user
account. By default, your personal localization settings are the same as the system localization
settings. See System and personal localization settings for details on the behavior of these
settings.

NOTE: Your personal localization settings also apply to the Vista and Designer applications.

NOTE: The profile details settings and change password option are only available for standard
accounts. For Windows accounts, this information is managed through Windows.

NOTE: The profile details and account password are the same as the ones configured for your
account with User Manager.

To change any of the personal preferences:

1. Edit the fields or select the options you want from the drop-down lists.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Report Theme
Change the Report theme to customize the Reports colors and the Reports logo.
To change the Reports colors:

1. Under Report Colors, select Use Theme Colors or Override Theme Colors.

TIP: The system theme colors are defined by the System Theme settings for the Web
Applications. See System Theme for more information.

2. If you choose Override Theme Colors, then set the colors for the Report Title, Section Header,
Table Header, Summary, Row Shading, and Section Title, using the drop-down selectors.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the Reports Logo:

1. In SETTINGS, open the Settings Library and click Report Theme.

2. Under Report Logo, click Select to open the Select Report Logo Image dialog.

3. Select an image currently available in the repository, or

a. Click Upload Image to choose an image file available on your system or drag an image
file into the application area.

b. Click Finish to add it to the image repository.

190 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

4. Click OK to complete your selection.

5. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

NOTE: You can use GIF, JPG, JPEG, or PNG image formats. The recommended file size is 250 x
100 pixels. Images are automatically re-sized to fit the logo area in Reports.

System Language
Use these system localization settings to select the language, region, and currency symbol. The
setting for Region determines date, time, number, and currency formats.

NOTE: Your personal localization settings overrule the system localization settings for your user
account. By default, your personal localization settings are the same as the system localization
settings. See System and personal localization settings for details on the behavior of these
settings.

NOTE: The system localization settings also apply to the diagrams displayed in the Vista
application.

To change any of the system localization settings:

1. Select the options you want from the drop-down lists.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

System Theme
Use the system theme settings to:

• Choose the Default theme or a User Defined theme

• Specify if you want to display the vendor logo in the top right corner of the Web applications
window.

• Change the image and text that is displayed in the top left corner of the Web Applications
window.

• Choose a theme color for the borders and other elements of the user interface. You can enable
high contrast mode which uses a dark background color for the application.

• Choose the location of the library panel to be on the right or left side of the user interface.

• Specify if you want to use compact mode navigation.

NOTE: Compact navigation replaces the main navigation bar at the top of the Web
Applications user interface with an options button . The options button is displayed at the
top left corner of the banner. When you click the button, the navigation links to the different
Web applications are shown. Compact mode is used for small displays, such as on mobile
devices. The Web Applications user interfaces switches to compact mode automatically
when the browser size is reduced below a certain size. Turning on the Always use compact
mode for Navigation setting forces this mode regardless of browser size.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 191

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Set the colors for the waveform and bust data plots.

• Reset the theme to system defaults.

To select the theme to be default or user defined:

1. Under General Theme, click Default Theme or click User Defined.

NOTE: With the Default Theme all color, image, and logo options are set to the factory
defaults. You can change the location of the navigation panel, choose to always use
compact mode, and you can customize the colors for the waveform and burst data plots.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To specify the display of the vendor logo:

1. Under General Theme, click User Defined.

2. Turn on Show Vendor logo to display the logo or turn off Show Vendor logo to hide the
logo, in the top right corner of the Web Applications window.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the top left logo and text:

1. Under General Theme, click User Defined.

2. Under Image, click Select.

3.  In Select Image, select the image you want, or if the image is not in the Image Library,
Click Upload Image and either choose an image file available on your system by clicking
Choose Files or drag an image file into the application area.

Click Finish to add it to the Image Library.

4. Click OK to complete your image selection.

The image file name is shown under Image. The image is updated on the banner when you
save your settings. You can use GIF, JPG, JPEG, or PNG image formats. The maximum file
size is 2MB. Images are automatically resized to fit the logo area on the banner.

5. Use the Text field to change the text beside the logo in the banner. The text is updated when
you save your settings.

6. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the theme color:

1. Under General Theme, click User Defined.

2. Under Theme Color, select from several preset color themes or create your own using the
color selector that opens when you click the color theme icon on the right. When you
click a preset color, it is temporarily applied to the interface to show you the effect of the
change.

TIP: Enable high contrast mode to create a dark mode type theme with dark backgrounds.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

192 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

To choose the location of the library panel:

1. Under Navigation, select Left or Right.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To specify the use of compact mode navigation:

1. Under Navigation, turn on Always use compact mode for Navigation.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the color settings for Waveform and Burst Data:

1. Under Waveform and Burst Data, set the color that is used to display the different
measurement types.

NOTE: Click Reset to Default to set the colors to the system default.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To reset the theme to the system defaults:

1. Click Default Theme.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Diagnostics and Usage

Diagnostics and Usage
Diagnostics and Usage anonymously sends data to a secure server. Schneider Electric uses this
data to help improve our software by understanding how you use it.

The diagnostics and usage service collects and sends data to Schneider Electric weekly on
Monday at 2:00 a.m. (server time), over HTTPS at port 443. Each time the service runs, it creates a
log file in the system\bin folder in the Power Monitoring Expert install location.

This operation is enabled by default.

NOTE: All diagnostics and usage data are sent to Schneider Electric anonymously. None of the
collected information identifies you or your company. For more information on the Schneider
Electric Privacy Policy, see the Schneider Data Privacy and Cookie Policy.

The following diagnostic and usage data is collected when it is enabled:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 193

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Diagnostic Data Usage Data

• Power Monitoring Expert version
• Total number of devices
• Operating system version and type (32- or
• Device type count
64-bit)
• Number of users
• Number of CPU cores

• System memory (RAM)

• .NET Framework version

• SQL Server version

• Distributed or local database

• City or region

• Number of monitors in use

• Client screen resolution

• Screen DPI

To disable the sending of data:

1. Open Web Applications and click Settings > Registration & Analytics > Diagnostics and
Services.

2. Select Disable in the dropdown list and click Save to apply the change.

Registration
Connected Services
Connected Services lets you share the operational data that is collected by Power Monitoring
Expert with Schneider Electric. The collected energy and power data can then be used by
connected services – such as EcoStruxure™ Power Advisor and EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor – to
help identify gaps or issues in your power management system. It can also help identify power
quality issues within your electrical distribution system.

The collected data depends on the specific services that the customer receives from Schneider
Electric. For more information on Connected Services, see the Power Advisor User Guide.

To disable the collecting of operational data, select Disable in the drop-down list and click Save to
apply the change.

Software registration
Registration information is used by Schneider Electric to help provide support and to enhance the
service we provide to you. Schneider Electric will never sell or share this information.

By registering you acknowledge that your registration information will be shared with Schneider
Electric and you consent to receiving occasional communications about your product. Product
communication includes new features, service pack releases, and recommended cybersecurity
updates.

You can edit the registration information at any time through the web application settings.

194 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Set Diagrams control options

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

You can enable or disable the ability to perform manual control actions in Diagrams. Manual control
actions include actions such as resetting values on devices or changing device configuration
settings. You can also set the confirmation method that is used by the software to confirm a control
action request before carrying it out.

Control in Diagrams is disabled by default.

NOTE: The required user access permissions for performing a control action are configured
individually for each control object in a diagram. This is done at design time in Vista. However, to
perform any control action in Diagrams you need at least controller-level access or higher
(operator-level, supervisor-level). This is true even if the permissions for a control object in a
diagram are set to user-level or view only-level. Only through Vista can users with user-level or
view only-level access perform control actions on such a control object. To view or change the
permissions on a control object, open the diagram in Vista. See Controlling system functions in
Vista help for information on control object configuration.

NOTE: Control in Diagrams is only available when a HTTPS connection is used between the PME
server and the Web Applications client.

To enable or disable control in Diagrams:

1. Open the Settings page from the SETTINGS link in the Web Applications banner.

2. In the Settings Library select Security > Diagrams Control Options.

NOTE: Only supervisor-level users can access the Diagrams Control Options settings.

3. In Diagrams Control Options, enable or disable manual control in Diagrams.

4. Click Save.

To set the confirmation method:

NOTE: Control in Diagrams must be enabled for the confirmation method settings to be displayed.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 195

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

1. Open the Settings page from the SETTINGS link in the Web Applications banner.

2. In the Settings Library select Security > Diagrams Control Options.

NOTE: Only supervisor-level users can access the Diagrams Control Options settings.

3. In Diagrams Control Options, select the confirmation method - Dialog Box without
Password or Dialog Box with Password.

NOTE: Control objects in diagrams can be configured, at design time, to always require
password confirmation. This configuration has priority over the confirmation method settings
above. See Controlling system functions in Vista help for information on control object
configuration.

4. Click Save.

Confirmation settings priority:

Control Object Setting Diagrams Setting Behavior

No Confirmation Confirmation Confirmation
No Confirmation Password Password
Confirmation Confirmation Confirmation
Confirmation Password Password
Password Confirmation Password
Password Password Password

Login Options
Use the login options settings to define how Windows users can log into the software. You can also
disallow login for standard users and only allow login for Windows users.
You can choose the following login options for Windows users:

• Manual Login Only

Windows users can log into the system by manually entering credentials on the login page.

• One-Click Login Only

Windows users can log into the system by clicking a hyperlink on the login page.

• Manual Login and One-Click Login

Windows users can log into the system by manually entering credentials, or by clicking a
hyperlink on the login page.

NOTE: Standard users, if allowed to log in, always have to enter their credentials manually.

If you only want to allow Windows user accounts to log into the software, you can disable standard
user login. For these options to be available, your system must have at least one Windows user
with supervisor-level access.

196 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Session Timeout
Use the session timeout settings to define the timeout behavior of the software web applications
and Windows applications clients.
You have to following options:

• You can enable and set a timeout for the web applications.

• You can enable and set a timeout for the Windows applications.

NOTE: You can enter a timeout value from 1 minute to 1440 minutes (1 day)

When a session timeout is configured, web application clients are logged out and Windows
application clients (Vista, Designer, Management Console) are locked after a period of inactivity.
The default timeout for both client types is 20 minutes. To restart or unlock the session you must
enter the login credentials.
A session is considered inactive when none of the following actions are detected for the duration of
the timeout period:

• Mouse movement

• Mouse clicks

• Keyboard activity

• Touch screen activity

Authorized Hosts
Use the authorized hosts settings to define third-party web resources that are allowed to either
embed (frame) the PME web applications, or to which the PME web applications can redirect
requests.

To define a third-party web resource as a Hosts That Can Frame, add the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) of that resource to the list, for example https://localhost:446.

NOTE: Add all the names (URLs) that might be used for a host, for example the server name,
"localhost", the IP address, and so on.

To define a third-party web resource as Hosts That Can Be Redirected To, add the hostname (no
protocol, no port number) of that resource to the list, for example localhost.

NOTE: Reset Internet Information Services (IIS) on the PME server after updating the Authorized
Hosts settings.

An example for an application that requires an entry in the Hosts That Can Frame list is the
integration of PME with EcoStruxure Building Operation. As part of that integration, PME Web
Applications are embedded in Building Operation. For this to work, the Building Operation server
URL must be added to the list of hosts that can frame.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 197

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Integration Utility
Use the integration utility settings to generate pre-authenticated links to PME resources. Use these
links to integrate web applications (Dashboard, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, Reports, and EWS
measurements) into third-party systems. You can authenticate the link using standard users or
Windows users.

To enable or disable the pre-authentication for standard users:

1. Under Pre-Authentication for Standard Users, turn Enable pre-authentication on or off.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To generate links:

1. Under Authentication Method, select the desired user type for authentication:

NOTICE
UNAUTHORIZED OR UNINTENDED ACCESS TO CONFIDENTIAL DATA
• Personnel generating the pre-authenticated links for integration into third-party systems
must be aware that links to data are not secure.
• Do not setup access links to sensitive or secure data.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unauthorized or unintended access
to sensitive or secure data.

Select Windows User.

NOTE: Links for Windows users contain no user information. Windows users accessing
the link must have permission to access the PME system and be authenticated with
Windows. One-click login must be enabled to use the Windows user authenticated links.
See Login Options for information for enabling one-click login.

Select Standard User, select the desired PME User Name and enter the Password.

NOTE: Links for standard users embed the user's account information. Take care on
usage of these links. Links cannot be generated for standard users with supervisor
access level.

2. Under Generate Links For, select the web applications for which you want to generate link.

3. Under Link Format, select the desired link format:

Select XML to generate an XML file of links. Use this option to generate links that can be
imported into applications like EcoStruxure Building Operation.

Select HTML to generate an HTML page of links. Use this option to verify the links.

NOTE: The download HTML link must be opened in a different browser to test the links.

198 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

4. Click Generate Web Application Links.

An XML or HTML file is downloaded to the default download location of the browser.

An example for an application that requires the generated link is the integration of PME with Building
Operation. As part of that integration, PME Web Applications are embedded in Building Operation.
For this to work, the generated links are imported in to Building Operation.

Rate Editor

Rate Editor is a Web-based application that lets you change cost values for items included in a
billing report.

Open Rate Editor from Web Applications Settings > System > Billing Rates. You can also open
Rate Editor from Management Console Tools > Web Tools.

The Rate File list on the left lists all of the rate files contained in the ratelibrary folder in the Power
Monitoring Expert install location under applications\config\reports\billing report.
When you add rate files to the folder, they are included in the Rate File list.

Rate Editor User Interface

The Line Item Label and Unit Cost areas on the right list a description of line items and the
associated cost values defined in each rate file. Click a rate file to view its line items and cost
values.
To modify the unit cost value for billing report purposes:

1. Click the unit cost value that you want to change to enable editing.

2. Type the new value and press Enter to complete the update.

3. To return to the previous value, click Undo.

The rate files included in the product are examples of various billing scenarios. The files are
intended to be copied and modified to meet your specific requirements. For further information about
creating or modifying rate files, see the documentation, tutorials, and examples included in the
Billing Module Toolkit (available in the Power Monitoring Expert Exchange).

Device Manager

TIP: You can open Device Manager from SETTINGS > System > Device Manager in the Web
Applications banner.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 199

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

NOTICE
NETWORK INOPERABILITY
Do not make unauthorized changes in the network configuration.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in an unstable or unusable network.

Use Device Manager to:

• Configure devices and sites.

• Import device and site configurations from other applications, such as ION Setup.

• Export device and site configuration in CSV format for use in another PME system.

• Import device and site configuration in CSV format for efficient configuration of large systems.

Device Manager or Management Console?

Device Manager shares the site and device configuration with Management Console. That means
you can use either application to configure sites and devices. Depending on your workflow you
might prefer to work in one or the other application. Device Manager is limited to configuring sites

200 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

and devices. Management Console offers additional configuration functions, such as modem
configuration or setting up connection schedules. Management Console also provides access to
maintenance and programming tools.

NOTE: You cannot add direct serial sites or modem sites with Device Manager. Use Management
Console to add these sites.

Use Device Manager for:

• exporting device and site configuration in CSV format

• importing device and site configuration in CSV format

• configuring devices and sites in the web interface

Use Management Console for:

• adding direct serial or modem sites

• configuring modems and connection schedules

• configuring managed circuits and logical devices

• configuring devices with advanced security

• accessing any of the maintenance and programming tools

• configuring devices and sites in a Windows application on an Engineering client

For more information and details on network configuration, see Management Console help.

Definitions

Sites

A site is a group of devices in the system that share a common communications link. A site can be
a direct site, a modem site, an Ethernet gateway site, or an OPC site.

Devices

A device is a meter or other component that communicates and gathers data and is installed on a
network.

To configure devices and sites, see:

Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 201

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Adding a device
Add a device to make this device and its data available for monitoring and analysis in PME. You can
add one device at a time using the Device Manager user interface. You can also import many
devices at once using configuration import.
To add a device using the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab, and then click Add Ethernet Device or click the
down arrow next to it to add a serial or OPC device. This opens the New Device dialog.

TIP: The right-click context menu for a device in the table has a Duplicate Device option to
create a copy of an existing device.

2. In New Device, enter the required information such as group name, device name, device type
and IP address.

TIP: Click Show Advanced to access advanced configuration settings. These settings
have factory defaults and only need to be changed for specific application needs.

3. (Optional) Enter Description information.

4. Click OK.

TIP: To add a device directly to a site, go to the Sites tab and right-click the site to open the
context menu.

To add one or more devices using configuration import:

1. In Device Manager, click Import. This opens the Import Devices and Sites dialog.

2. In Import Devices and Sites, download the configuration import template CSV file.

202 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

3. Open the downloaded configuration import template in a text editor and add the configuration
information for the devices you want to add.

4. Save the file in CSV format.

5. Return to the Device Manager Import Devices and Sites dialog and click Next.

6. Click Upload Files. This opens the Upload new files dialog.

7. In Upload new files, click Choose Files and find the configuration import template CSV file.
Click Open. Click Finish.

TIP: You can also drag and drop the configuration import file into the designated area in
Upload new files.

8. Follow the steps in the import wizard to complete the configuration import.

9. Click Finish in the import wizard.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 203

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Editing a device
Edit a device to update its group name or name, or to change its configuration settings. You can edit
devices using the Device Manager user interface or configuration import.
To edit a single device using the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to edit, then right-click in the row
and select Edit Device in the context menu. This opens the Device Configuration dialog.

TIP: Double-click a row to open the Device Configuration dialog.

3. In Device Configuration, update the configuration settings as needed.

4. Click OK.

To edit multiple devices using the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to edit, then right-click in the
selected row area and select Edit <number> Devices in the context menu. This opens the
Device Configuration dialog.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices. Use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. In Device Configuration, update the configuration settings as needed.

NOTE: Only those settings that are common to all selected devices can be configured at the
same time.

4. Click OK.

To edit devices using configuration import:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. Export the existing configuration in one of the following ways:

a. To export the configuration for a single device:
In the devices table, select the row of the device for which you want to export the
configuration, then right-click in the row and select Export Device Configuration for
Editing in the context menu. This exports the configuration and saves it in CSV file
format to your local Downloads folder.

b. To export the configuration for multiple devices:

In the devices table, select the rows of the devices for which you want to export the
configuration, then right-click in the selected row area and select Export
Configuration for <number> Devices for Editing in the context menu. This
exports the configuration and saves it in CSV file format to your local Downloads
folder.

204 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a

block of devices.

c. To export the configuration for all devices:

Click Options in the top right corner of the Devices pane, and then click Export
Devices Configuration for Editing in the options menu. This exports the
configuration and saves it in CSV file format to your local Downloads folder.

3. Open the exported configuration file in a text editor and edit the configuration information for
the devices as needed.

NOTE: Do not edit the content of the UniqueSystemId column.

4. Save the file in CSV format.

5. In Device Manager, click Import. This opens the import wizard.

6. Follow the steps in the import wizard to complete the configuration import.

7. Click Finish in the import wizard.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 205

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Deleting a device
Delete a device if it is no longer needed, for example if the device has been removed from service.

NOTE: When a device is deleted in Device Manager it is marked as Historical device in the
system and removed from the default view of the devices table. All historical data associated with
the deleted device remains in the system and is still available for analysis and reporting.

TIP: Adjust the filter options in the devices grid in Device Manager to see Historical devices in the
system. See Device Manager user interface for details on the Devices filter.

To delete a device:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to delete, then right-click in the row
and select Delete Device in the context menu. This opens the Delete Device confirmation
dialog.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

To delete multiple devices:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to delete, then right-click in the
selected row area and select Delete <number> Devices in the context menu. This opens the
Delete Device confirmation dialog.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

206 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

Disconnect an Ethernet device to temporarily remove it from the communication network, for
example for system testing. Connect an Ethernet device, that was previously disconnected, to
restore its communication network connection.
To connect a single Ethernet device:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to connect.

3. Right-click in the row and select Connect Ethernet Device in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the device in the devices table to
confirm that the device is connected. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

To connect multiple Ethernet devices:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to connect.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Connect <number> Ethernet Devices in the
context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the devices in the devices table to
confirm that the devices are connected. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

To disconnect a single Ethernet device:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to disconnect.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 207

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Right-click in the row and select Disconnect Ethernet Device in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the device in the devices table to
confirm that the device is disconnected. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

To disconnect multiple Ethernet devices:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to disconnect.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Disconnect <number> Ethernet Devices in
the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the devices in the devices table to
confirm that the devices are disconnected. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

208 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• Viewing system device license status

Enabling or disabling a device

Disable a device to remove it from the communication network. For example, disable a device that
is out of service. Enable a device that was previously disabled to reconnect it to the communication
network.
To enable a single device:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to enable.

3. Right-click in the row and select Enable Device in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the device in the devices table to
confirm that the device is enabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

To enable multiple devices:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to enable.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Enable <number> Devices in the context
menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the devices in the devices table to
confirm that the devices are enabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

To disable a single device:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device you want to disable.

3. Right-click in the row and select Disable Device in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the device in the devices table to
confirm that the device is disabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 209

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To disable multiple devices:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the rows of the devices you want to disable.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual devices, use Shift+click to select a block of
devices.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Disable <number> Devices in the context
menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the devices in the devices table to
confirm that the devices are disabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the
communication status is updated in the table.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

210 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Viewing a device diagram

Device diagrams are device type specific diagrams in the Diagrams application that show historical
and real-time data for a device. You can open a device diagram for a device directly from Device
Manager.

NOTE: To see data in a diagram, the device must be connected to and communicating with PME.

To view a device diagram:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. In the devices table, select the row of the device for which you want to open the diagram, then
right-click in the row and select View Device Diagram in the context menu. This opens the
device type specific diagram for this device in a new tab in your browser.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 211

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Adding a site
A site is a gateway to establish a connection between the software and a group of devices. Add
sites to connect devices with serial communication or to connect OPC devices.

NOTE: You do not add sites for Ethernet devices. You add Ethernet devices directly to the
system. See Adding a device for details. The software automatically sets up an internal site for
each Ethernet device. These internal sites are not visible in Device Manager.

NOTE: You cannot add direct serial sites or modem sites with Device Manager. Use Management
Console to add these sites.

You can add sites through the Device Manager user interface, one site at a time. You can also add
one or more sites at the same time through importing site configuration information.
To add a site through the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab, and then click Add Ethernet Gateway or click the
down arrow next to it to add an OPC site. This opens the New Site dialog.

TIP: The right-click context menu for a site in the table has a Duplicate Site option to create
a copy of an existing site.

2. In New Site, enter the required information such as name, IP address, and so on.

TIP: Click Show Advanced to access advanced configuration settings. These settings
have factory defaults and only need to be changed for specific application needs.

3. (Optional) Enter Description information.

4. Click OK.

To add one or more sites through configuration import:

1. In Device Manager, click Import. This opens the Import Devices and Sites dialog.

2. In Import Devices and Sites, download the configuration import template CSV file.

3. Open the downloaded configuration import template in a text editor and add the configuration
information for the sites you want to add.

4. Save the file in CSV format.

5. Return to the Device Manager Import Devices and Sites dialog and click Next.

6. Click Upload Files. This opens the Upload new files dialog.

7. In Upload new files, click Choose Files and find the configuration import template CSV file.
Click Open. Click Finish.

TIP: You can also drag and drop the configuration import file into the designated area in
Upload new files.

8. Follow the steps in the import wizard to complete the configuration import.

9. Click Finish in the import wizard.

212 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Editing a site
Edit a site to update its name or to change its configuration settings. You can edit sites through the
Device Manager user interface or through exporting, editing, and then re-importing the site
configuration.
To edit a single site through the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to edit, then right-click in the row and
select Edit Site in the context menu. This opens the Site Configuration dialog.

TIP: You can also double-click a row to open the Site Configuration dialog.

3. In Site Configuration, update the configuration settings as needed.

4. Click OK.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 213

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To edit multiple sites through the Device Manager user interface:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to edit, then right-click in the selected
row area and select Edit <number> Sites in the context menu. This opens the Site
Configuration dialog.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. In Site Configuration, update the configuration settings as needed.

NOTE: Only those settings that are common to all selected sites can be configured at the
same time.

4. Click OK.

To edit sites through configuration import:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. Export the existing configuration in one of the following ways:

a. To export the configuration for a single site:
In the sites table, select the row of the site for which you want to export the
configuration, then right-click in the row and select Export Site Configuration for
Editing in the context menu. This exports the configuration and saves it in CSV file
format to your local Downloads folder.

b. To export the configuration for multiple sites:

In the sites table, select the rows of the sites for which you want to export the
configuration, then right-click in the selected row area and select Export
Configuration for <number> Sites for Editing in the context menu. This exports
the configuration and saves it in CSV file format to your local Downloads folder.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a

block of sites.

c. To export the configuration for all sites:

Click Options in the top right corner of the Sites pane, and then click Export
Sites Configuration for Editing in the options menu. This exports the configuration
and saves it in CSV file format to your local Downloads folder.

3. Open the exported configuration file in a text editor and edit the configuration information for
the sites as needed.

NOTE: Do not edit the content of the UniqueSystemId column.

4. Save the file in CSV format.

5. In Device Manager, click Import. This opens the import wizard.

214 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

6. Follow the steps in the import wizard to complete the configuration import.

7. Click Finish in the import wizard.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Deleting a site
Delete a site if this site is no longer needed, for example if all the devices connected to the site have
been removed from service.
To delete a site:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to delete, then right-click in the row and
select Delete Site in the context menu. This opens the Delete Site confirmation dialog.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 215

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To delete multiple sites:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to delete, then right-click in the
selected row area and select Delete <number> Sites in the context menu. This opens the
Delete Site confirmation dialog.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Connecting or disconnecting a site

Disconnect a site to temporarily remove the devices on this site from the communication network,
for example for system testing. Connect a site, that was previously disconnected, to reestablish its
communication network connection.

216 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

To connect a single site:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to connect.

3. Right-click in the row and select Connect Site in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the site in the sites table to confirm that
the site is connected. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication status is
updated in the table.

To connect multiple sites:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to connect.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Connect <number> Sites in the context
menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the sites in the sites table to confirm
that the sites are connected. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication
status is updated in the table.

To disconnect a single site:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to disconnect.

3. Right-click in the row and select Disconnect Site in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the site in the sites table to confirm that
the site is disconnected. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication status
is updated in the table.

To disconnect multiple sites:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to disconnect.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Disconnect <number> Sites in the context
menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the sites in the sites table to confirm
that the sites are disconnected. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication
status is updated in the table.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 217

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Enabling or disabling a site

Disable a site to remove this site from the communication network, for example if the devices on
this site are out of service for a longer period of time. Enable a site, that was previously disabled, to
reestablish its communication network connection.
To enable a single site:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to enable.

3. Right-click in the row and select Enable Site in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the site in the sites table to confirm that
the site is enabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication status is
updated in the table.

218 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

To enable multiple sites:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to enable.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Enable <number> Sites in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the sites in the sites table to confirm
that the sites are enabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication status
is updated in the table.

To disable a single site:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the row of the site you want to disable.

3. Right-click in the row and select Disable Site in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the site in the sites table to confirm that
the site is disabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication status is
updated in the table.

To disable multiple sites:

1. In Device Manager, select the Sites tab.

2. In the sites table, select the rows of the sites you want to disable.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual sites, use Shift+click to select a block of
sites.

3. Right-click in the selected row area and select Disable <number> Sites in the context menu.

TIP: Inspect the Communication Status column for the sites in the sites table to confirm
that the sites are disabled. Note that there can be a time delay until the communication
status is updated in the table.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 219

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

Export the device and site configuration of a system for importing into another system. For example,
configure the sites and devices in a test system and then export this configuration for use in a
production system.

NOTE: You cannot import the configuration back into the same system from which it was
exported.

To export the network configuration for use in a different system:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices or the Sites tab.

2. Click Options in the top right corner of the display pane, and then click Export Network
Configuration for Use in a Different System in the options menu. This exports the
configuration and saves it in CSV file format to your local Downloads folder.

3. Transfer the exported configuration file to the target system.

4. Import the configuration file into the target system. See Importing network configuration from a
different system for details.

NOTE: Keep the configuration file secure during and after the transfer to prevent unauthorized
access.

220 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices to help prevent unauthorized access to the software.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Work with facility IT System Administrators to ensure that the system adheres to the site-specific
cybersecurity policies.
Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Importing network configuration from a different system

Import the device and site configuration that was exported from another system. For example, to
create a copy of an existing system or to transfer the configuration from a test system into a
production system. You can also import the configuration from configuration tools, such as ION

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 221

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Setup.

NOTE: You cannot import the configuration back into the same system from which it was
exported.

To import the network configuration from a different system:

1. In Device Manager, click Import. This opens the import wizard.

2. Follow the steps in the import wizard. Select the configuration file from the other system when
prompted by the wizard to upload the import file.

3. Complete the configuration import in the import wizard.

4. Click Finish in the import wizard.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

Viewing system device license status

View device license status to verify that the required device licenses are activated in your system.
For example, confirm that enough free licenses are available before adding a number of new devices
to the system.

222 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Activate product and component licenses prior to the expiry of the trial license.
• Activate sufficient licenses for the servers and devices in your system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.

To view system device license status:

1. In Device Manager, select the Devices tab.

2. Click Options in the top right corner of the display pane, and then click View Device
Licenses in the options menu. This opens the Device License Information dialog.

Related topics:
Devices

• Adding a device

• Editing a device

• Deleting a device

• Connecting or disconnecting an Ethernet device

• Enabling or disabling a device

• Viewing a device diagram

Sites

• Adding a site

• Editing a site

• Deleting a site

• Connecting or disconnecting a site

• Enabling or disabling a site

Network

• Exporting network configuration for use in a different system

• Importing network configuration from a different system

For reference information see:

• Device Manager

• Device Manager user interface

• Viewing system device license status

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 223

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Device Manager references

This section contains reference information related to Device Manager.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Device Manager user interface

224 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Device Manager user interface

Main user interface (UI) and Devices tab

Main UI

Selection tabs
1
Select a tab to see information related to Devices or Sites.
Help
2
Click Help to open the Device Manager online help.
Number of displayed items
10
Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number in the system.
Page selector
11 Use the page selector to navigate between pages of information. Set the number of items
that are displayed on a page.

Devices tab

Add Ethernet Device

Use Add Ethernet Device to add a new Ethernet device to the system. To add a Serial
Device, connected through an Ethernet gateway, or an OPC device, click the down arrow and
3 select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu.

NOTE: To add serial devices that are directly connected to the system, for example through
a RS485 converter, or to add Logical Devices, use Management Console.

Import
Use the import wizard to import device or site configuration into the system. You can import
4 configuration from a different system, from configuration tools, or edited configuration from
the same system. See Importing network configuration from a different system and Editing a
device, Editing a site for more details.
Devices filter
5 Use the devices filter to customize which devices are displayed in the devices table. You can
filter by Communication Status, Type, and Enabled State.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 225

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Search Devices box.

6
Enter a search string to find devices in the devices table.
Refresh
Click Refresh to update the table content and show changes to the device configuration that
might have been done through Management Console.
7
NOTE: The Communication Status indicator in the table is updated automatically every 10
seconds. To update the configuration information use Refresh.

Options menu
The Options menu contains the following options:
- Show/Hide Columns
- Clear Filter
8
- View Device Licenses
- Export Devices Configuration for Editing
- Export Network Configuration for Use in a Different System
- Refresh
Devices table
9 The devices table shows devices that are configured in the system. Which devices are
displayed in the table is controlled by the devices filter, see 5 above.

Sites tab

Add Ethernet Gateway

1 Use Add Ethernet Gateway to add a new Ethernet Gateway site to the system. To add an
OPC site, click the down arrow and select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu.
Import
Use the import wizard to import device or site configuration into the system. You can import
2 configuration from a different system, from configuration tools, or edited configuration from
the same system. See Importing network configuration from a different system and Editing a
device, Editing a site for more details.
Sites filter
3 Use the sites filter to customize which sites are displayed in the sites table. You can filter by
Communication Status, Type, and Enabled State.
Search Sites box.
4
Enter a search string to find sites in the sites table.

226 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Refresh
Click Refresh to update the table content and show changes to the site configuration that
might have been done through Management Console.
5
NOTE: The Communication Status indicator in the table is updated automatically every 10
seconds. To update the configuration information use Refresh.

Options menu
The Options menu contains the following options:
- Show/Hide Columns
6 - Clear Filter
- Export Sites Configuration for Editing
- Export Network Configuration for Use in a Different System
- Refresh
Sites table
7 The sites table shows sites that are configured in the system. Which sites are displayed in
the table is controlled by the sites filter, see 3 above.

Hierarchy Manager

Depending on the number of devices you are currently monitoring, organizing the data coming from
those devices can be a difficult task. Hierarchy Manager allows you to organize the devices in
EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert into recognizable views by defining their relationships as
parts of a system model. Once the model has been created, energy data associated with the
hierarchy can be grouped, aggregated, and used by other components of Power Monitoring Expert.

The Hierarchy Manager views are intended to represent the real world electrical, physical, and
business characteristics of your organization. The items contained in a view, and how those items
relate to each other are specified using a template approach. There are several example templates
included in the product to help you create the views applicable to your organization. One of these
templates is configured when Power Monitoring Expert is first installed.

Open the Hierarchy Manager from Settings > System > Hierarchies in the Web Applications
banner. You can also open Hierarchy Manager from the Tools > Web Tools menu in the
Management Console.
The following topics provide specific information regarding the features and use of the Hierarchy
Manager application:

• Hierarchy templates
Nodes

Node properties

Common elements of hierarchy templates

• Creating a hierarchy

• Creating an apportioned meter

• Creating a virtual meter

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 227

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Dynamic hierarchy

• Meter apportionment

• Virtual meter

• Using hierarchies in other applications

After you have configured the views of the hierarchy structure, you can use them in different areas
of Power Monitoring Expert.

NOTE: Before using Hierarchy Manager, ensure that devices, logical devices, or managed circuits
have been added to Power Monitoring Expert through the Management Console component.

Hierarchy templates
When the Hierarchy Manager application opens, everything displayed in the application is based on
the hierarchy template defined in the system. This template defines the parameters of the model. If
you were to describe the physical layout of a building for example, you could describe the name of
the building, each floor of the building, and the rooms or areas that each floor contains. The
hierarchy template for a building's physical layout does the same thing, using Nodes to represent
the different aspects of the model.

Note that a Virtual Meter Node is included in the hierarchy template. You can define virtual meters
without associating them with a hierarchy, or you can include virtual meters in a hierarchy the same
way that you include devices. You can select virtual meters for many of the reports in the Reports
application.

Each Node contains instances of that particular Node type, which in turn are defined by a set of
properties. These properties not only define the different parts of the model, they also define the
relationships that exist between the different Nodes. This is useful when aggregating the device
data used in other parts of Power Monitoring Expert.

Once the model has been created, the devices that are collecting data can be associated with the
different levels of the hierarchy that are defined in the template.

Nodes
A Node can be described as the building block of a hierarchy. Nodes are used to model a customer
system and can represent:

• Electrical equipment

• Logical concepts

• Physical locations

• Other real-world objects

Nodes are displayed in Hierarchy Manager as a set of tabs. Each tab is labeled with the name of the
part of the model it represents. Each Node displays a number of Node instances in a grid format. In
Hierarchy Manager, a Node can be described as the type of object required to model a system,

228 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

while Node instances can be thought of as the reference to the real-world objects in that system.
For example, if 'Car' is used as an example of a Node, then 'my Corvette' could describe an
instance of the Car Node.

A hierarchy that represents the physical layout of a company's industrial site might have a Site
Node, a Building Node, and an Areas Node. Each of those Nodes can contain instances of that
Node type. Under the Building Node for example, you could list the different buildings located in a
particular site. The Properties of each of these Nodes are specified by the user.

Each Node instance is represented in the system as a set of properties that define the
characteristics of that instance. These properties can be further broken down into Attributes and
References.

Node properties
Attributes and References can be used to describe the properties of a Node, and their relationships
to other Nodes. These properties provide the context that helps to describe the different parts of the
model. For example, a Node called Floors might contain attributes such as floor number, and
references such as the association between the Floors Node and the Building Node, or the
association between Floors and Areas.

Attributes

The Attributes of a Node describe the properties of that Node, such as its name and characteristics.
These Attributes could include the breaker rating of an electrical panel or contact information of a
tenant. For example, a Node called Buildings that is part of a physical layout hierarchy could have
an Attribute such as the building name.

Attributes are configurable by entering information into an Attribute field. To add Attribute content to
a new Node instance, select a tab and click Add. To edit existing Attribute content, double-click a
Node instance, or highlight it and click Edit. When the Properties dialog opens, select an attribute
field by clicking in the applicable field and entering the necessary information. Click OK when you
finish specifying all of the necessary attributes for the Node.

References

References describe how a Node in a hierarchy is associated with other Nodes. For example, in a
hierarchy that describes the physical layout of a company's building, a Node called Floor could have
a reference that describes its association with a Node called Areas. These references indicate
which offices are part of each floor. In this example, since a Floor can contain many offices, it is
considered a one-to-many association. Since an office can only be associated with a single floor, it
is considered a one-to-one association. By making these connections between the Nodes, the
hierarchy structure of the model begins to take shape.

Reference fields require clicking Add, Edit, or Delete. To add reference content to a Node instance,
click Add for the reference, then select the appropriate entry from the list that appears. You can also
enter dynamic hierarchy time ranges in this section.

To edit existing reference content, double-click the entry in the grid, or highlight it and click Edit, and
then make the necessary changes. In most cases, this change would involve either the start or end
dates of the particular reference.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 229

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To delete existing reference content, select an entry from the applicable reference type and click
Delete.

NOTE: The Delete button should not be used to end an association with a particular Node
instance. When a relationship between two Node instances ends after a certain date, the ideal
solution is to edit the references and change the To field to a specific end date that defines the
time range for the relationship. See Creating a hierarchy for more information.

Common elements of hierarchy templates

The components that make up Hierarchy Manager can appear differently depending on the hierarchy
template installed in the system. Although these different hierarchy templates can have different tab
and property names, and the relationships between the Nodes differ, the method used to modify the
hierarchy is similar for most templates. This section provides information regarding the basic steps
to modifying a hierarchy, regardless of the template used.

Hierarchy Manager has a series of tabs across the top of the page. These tabs are the
representation of the Nodes. Clicking on any of these tabs displays the instances of the Node types
in a grid format.

The process involved with creating an instance of a Node type is the same for most hierarchy
templates. To create a new instance, select the applicable tab and click Add. The Properties
window opens, containing fields that represent the properties for that particular Node instance. Any
required fields are identified with a Required message. Click in the attribute fields and enter the
necessary information. Reference fields are selected from a grid and can also have a time
dimension associated with them (see Dynamic hierarchy for additional information). Click Add to
open the Select dialog and select the applicable item from the grid. If there are no items to choose
from, you might need to create a new instance for that Node type.

To edit an instance of a Node type, click the applicable tab, double-click an instance in the grid, or
select it and click Edit. Make the changes to the applicable fields in the Properties dialog and click
OK.

To delete an existing instance of a Node type, select the applicable tab, select an instance on that
tab and click Delete. After you confirm the delete action, the instance disappears from the grid, and
any reference information regarding the deleted instance is removed from all affected Node
instances.

Tree View

Displaying the views of a template is also similar for most template types. You can see the view of
a hierarchy by clicking the Show Views link. The view shows the different levels of the hierarchy,
and the date range for each entry of the hierarchy.

Date Range: Use the To and From fields to select the date range to display the hierarchy.

Available Views: Use this section to switch between different views if there is more than one view
available. The available views are determined by the hierarchy template. Click Update when you
change the date range, the scale, or view.

Scale: Select Days or Months to provide the appropriate scale to the hierarchy view.

230 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Beside each hierarchy level is a bar that indicates when in the date range the Node was part of the
hierarchy. If the bar has a rounded edge, the Node reference has an end date within the date range.
If the bar has a square edge, the Node reference continues beyond the date range.

You can click the pencil (edit) icon to the left of the bars to open and edit the properties for the
related item.

If you do not see a node in the hierarchy view, make sure the date range includes the date that Node
was part of the hierarchy. You can view the date range for a hierarchy entry by hovering the pointer
on it.

Creating a hierarchy
The following example uses the default hierarchy template (with Site, Buildings, and Areas nodes)
to illustrate the basic functionality of Hierarchy Manager.

In this scenario, we are the facility manager for Faber College. The college includes three buildings,
two of which have already been added to Hierarchy Manager. Building Three has just been
completed, and we must add this building to our hierarchy using Hierarchy Manager. This involves
creating a new building and areas entries, and adding devices to the areas, all beginning on a
specific date.

At the same time, renovations to Building Two have just been completed which include the
replacement of a meter. We need to swap the old device with the new one in our hierarchy by setting
the end date for the existing device and the start date for the new device. The new device must be
associated with the correct area.

Open Hierarchy Manager

NOTE: Access to this application or function is controlled by user privileges. See Default User
Access Level Privileges in Web Applications help, and Customizing Access Level Privileges
in User Manager help for details.

1. Open Hierarchy Manager in one of the following ways:

From Web Applications Settings > System > Hierarchies

From Management Console Tools > Web Tools > Hierarchy Manager.

2. Type a user name and password in the Log In dialog, if required, and click OK to open
Hierarchy Manager.

NOTE: In the following steps, devices have already been added to the system, and the
hierarchy has been populated with site, building, and area information.

Site, Buildings, and Areas tabs represent each Node type.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 231

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Add a building to the hierarchy

1. Click the Buildings tab.

The Buildings grid includes Building One and Two, the site they are associated with, and the
areas defined for each building.

2. To add Building Three, click Add above the Buildings grid to open the Properties dialog for the
Buildings node, then enter the building name in the Name field.

3. Click Add above the Site grid, in the properties dialog, to open the Add Site References
dialog and select the Faber College site name in the grid. Then click the From date field or
click the calendar icon beside it at the bottom of the dialog. Select a start date in the calendar.

232 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

4. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Sites, then click OK.

Associate areas and devices to Building Three

1. Click the Areas tab.

A new area needs to be created, Area 3. Associate this area with the new building, assign a
device to the area, and set the start date.

2. Click Add above the Areas grid to open the Properties dialog for the Areas node, then type
Area 3 in the Name field.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 233

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Click Add above the Building grid to open the Add Building References dialog.

4. Select Building Three in the grid.

5. Click the From field or click the calendar icon and select a start date.

6. Confirm that the date has changed in the From field under Building, then click OK.

7. Click Add above the Device grid to open the Add Device References dialog.

8. Select a device.

9. Click the From field or click the calendar icon and select a start date.

10. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Device, then click OK.

The following image shows the complete set of entries on the Areas tab.

View the hierarchy in a tree configuration

To see the hierarchy in a tree organization, switch to the Tree View by clicking Show Views, in the
top right corner of the Hierarchy Manager window. You can use this window to select the type of
view you want to see (if multiple views are available), and the date range for the view. Click Update
to refresh the view after you make your selections.
Click:

• The plus sign in the view to expand that entry.

• The minus sign beside an entry to collapse that part of the hierarchy.

• The pencil (edit) icon to open and edit the properties for the related item.

234 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• The bar for each entry to see the Node name and the effective date range for that entry.

• Click Show Types to return to the initial Hierarchy Manager page.

Adding and removing devices

This part of the example involves replacing a device in Building Two after a renovation. Set the end
date for the device you are replacing to the date they are removed. Then assign a new device to the
area with the start date set to the day the device is installed.

The device that you are replacing is associated with Area 2 in Building Two.
When this task is complete:

• The entry for the old device is dimmed and italicized in the hierarchy if the End Date is the
current date or earlier.

• Any reports that include the area only include data collected by the device up to this new end
date.

NOTE: Date ranges extend from start of day to start of day. This means that the end date does not
include data collected for that day.

1. Open Hierarchy Manager and click the Areas tab.

2. Double-click Area 2 in the grid or select it and click Edit to open the properties dialog.

3. Double-click Campus.Library device in the Device grid, or select it and click Edit to open the
Edit Device References dialog.

4. Click the To field, or click the calendar icon beside it, and select the end date.

5. Confirm that the date has changed in the End Date column under Device, then click OK.

6. Click Add above the Device grid to open the Add Device References dialog.

7. Select the new device, Campus.Library_NEW.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 235

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

8. Click the From field or click the calendar icon beside it. Select the start date.

9. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Device, then click OK.

When you complete these tasks, any reports that include this area with a date range that extends
beyond the device start date includes data collected by the new device as of their start date. The
reports do not include any data for the removed device as of their end date.

Creating an apportioned meter

You can create an apportioned meter when you add a device to a hierarchy node by changing the
value in the Percentage field in the Add Device References dialog. The default value is 100 percent.
The percentage can be a negative, positive, or integer value. The percentage field is restricted to 15
characters. Time intervals for apportioned meters function in the same way as devices. See Meter
apportionment for more information.
To create an apportioned meter:

1. In Hierarchy Manager, open the AREAS tab.

2. Select the area for which you want to create an apportioned meter and click Edit to open the
properties dialog.

3. In the area properties dialog, under Devices, select the device and click Edit. This opens the
Edit Device References dialog.

4. Change the value in the Percentage field.

5. If required, click the From or To fields to change the start and end dates for the apportioned
meter.

6. Click OK.

Creating a virtual meter

The Virtual Meter tab includes Add, Edit, and Delete controls above a data grid showing any
previously created virtual meters.

236 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Add: Selecting Add opens the Properties dialog. Type a name for the virtual meter and click Add in
the Devices area to select devices to attach to it. You can attach a device, a previously created
virtual meter, or an apportioned meter in the same way you attach a device to a hierarchy node.

Time intervals for start and end dates work the same as on meters attached to hierarchy nodes.

Edit: Editing a virtual meter is like editing the relationship between a hierarchy node and a device.
You can add, edit, or delete virtual meters but you need to ensure that your changes respect time
intervals.

For example, if you are replacing a meter, you need to update the End Date for it, and you need to
specify an appropriate Start Date for the new meter. Do not delete the original meter as this
removes the meter historically.

Delete: You can delete a virtual meter, but you need to take care when doing so. When you delete a
virtual meter, the relationships between all hierarchy nodes and the virtual meter are removed.

Adding a virtual meter to a hierarchy node

After you create a virtual meter, it appears in device lists with the other devices. You can attach a
virtual meter to a hierarchy node in the same way as the other devices.

See Virtual meter for more information.

Dynamic hierarchy
Another feature of Hierarchy Manager is the ability to assign devices or Node instances for discrete
units of time. Instead of devices existing in either an assigned or unassigned state independent of
time, a device can be assigned to one Node instance for a specific length of time, then assigned to
another instance for another length of time.

With this time dimension, Hierarchy Manager can be used by organizations that require an ever-
changing representation of their system. If one tenant moves out and another moves in, that change
can be reflected in the hierarchy. Energy and power usage can be tracked for each tenant over time,
and billing information can be collected, aggregated, and displayed in a report.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 237

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

NOTE: If your hierarchy does not change over time you do not need to set the date ranges for the
various devices or Node instances. In Power Monitoring Expert, these static hierarchies exist from
the date when the system was first commissioned (system start), to the farthest date the system
recognizes (end of time).

Replacing or reconfiguring a device can also be captured in a hierarchy. If a device requires

replacement or reconfiguring, it can be unassigned from an instance on a specific date, and the new
or reconfigured device assigned to the same instance. The entry for the unassigned device is
grayed-out and italicized in the hierarchy if the End Date is the current date or earlier.

Dynamic hierarchies are established when you create or edit the properties of a Node instance that
is associated with a device. For example, if Customer A is set to lease a rack from a data center,
you can assign the racks and circuits to that customer on a specific date. When tenant A's lease
expires, you can remove the assignment of the racks and circuits on the expiration date and
reallocate them to tenant B.

See Creating a hierarchy for details on how to use the dynamic hierarchies function.

Meter apportionment
Meter apportionment allows you to assign a percentage of a device that has been assigned to an
area. For example, if a common area is monitored by a single meter but shared by two tenants, for
billing purposes you might want to allocate only a portion of the meter to each tenant. If tenant 1
uses 60% of the common area and tenant 2 uses 40%, you can attach 60% of a meter's reading to
the tenant 1 area node and the other 40% to the tenant 2 area node.

See Creating an apportioned meter for more information.

Virtual meter
A virtual meter allows you to aggregate measurements from any combination of devices,
apportioned meters, or other virtual meters available in Hierarchy Manager. The newly created
virtual meter can be assigned to a node in Hierarchy Manager just like any other device and appears
in dialogs that have a Views selection. You can even create an apportioned meter from a virtual
meter.
Examples:

• Assume that there are several feeder meters connected to the main power bus and you want to
calculate the total power usage. You can create a virtual meter that includes each of the feeder
meters. Then you can choose one of the reports supporting virtual meters to generate a report
showing the total power usage for the virtual meter.

• Assume that there is a large area monitored by a single meter (M1). Within that area is a single
room that is monitored by a separate meter (M2). Tenant 1 is using the small room and Tenant 2
is using the remaining area. To calculate Tenant 2's power usage, the readings from M2 must
be subtracted from the readings of M1. This can be accomplished by assigning M1 and an
apportioned meter of M2 with an allocation of -100%, removing M2's readings from Tenant 2's
power usage calculation.

238 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

The alternative is to create a virtual meter. For example, create a new virtual meter Tenant_2_
Net_Meter, and assign the two devices, M1 and M2 (-100%), to the virtual meter. The virtual
meter is assigned to Tenant 2's node. If at some time in the future a new meter is added, you
can edit the virtual meter to include the new meter.

See Creating a virtual meter for more information.

Data aggregation in Hierarchies

A Hierarchy aggregates the measurements from the device nodes all the way up through the
different hierarchy levels. For example, a hierarchy with the levels Building > Floor > Areas, where
the monitoring devices are associated with the Areas, will show the aggregation of all the area
measurements for a floor at the Floor level and the aggregation of all floor measurements at the
Building level.
Example: Measurements aggregating up the hierarchy

Hierarchy Level 1 Hierarchy Level 2 Hierarchy Level 3 Hierarchy Level 4

Building [22kWh] (aggregated)

Floor 1 [10kWh] (aggregated)

Area 1 [7kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 5kWh (measured)

Device - 2kWh (measured)

Area 2 [3kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 3kWh (measured)
Floor 2 [12kWh] (aggregated)

Area 3 [12kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 12kWh (measured)

The starting point for the aggregation in the Hierarchy is a device node. The Hierarchy will not
include measurements from nodes below the device node in the aggregation.
Example: Device nodes are the beginning of the aggregation.

Hierarchy Level 1 Hierarchy Level 2 Hierarchy Level 3 Hierarchy Level 4

Building [14kWh]
(aggregated)
Floor 1 [2kWh] (aggregated)
Device - 2kWh (measured)
Area 1 [7kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 5kWh (measured)

Device - 2kWh (measured)

Area 2 [3kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 3kWh (measured)
Floor 2 [12kWh] (aggregated)

Area 3 [12kWh] (aggregated)

Device - 12kWh (measured)

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 239

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

By associating a device with the Floor 1 node, this node becomes the starting point for the
aggregation. The measurements of the child nodes Area 1 and Area 2 are ignored. Only the device
measurement associated with Floor 1 is included in the aggregation.

NOTE: Not all Hierarchy nodes can have devices associated with them. If devices can be
associated with a certain node level in a hierarchy or not, is defined in the template for this
hierarchy.

Using hierarchies in other applications

You can use hierarchies in the following Power Monitoring Expert (PME) applications:

• Dashboards

• Reports

• Trends

In the Dashboards application, you can use hierarchies in the gadget data series selector to select
data from a source based on its location in the hierarchy. Selecting a hierarchy View allows you to
group device data at different aggregation points in the hierarchy. For example, it is possible to
create a dashboard that depicts the energy usage of a single floor in a building as a single data
series even though there are multiple meters monitoring different circuits.

You can also use hierarchies in several of the reports available in the Reports application. You can
use the source selector for these reports to select items from the hierarchy to include in the report.
As in the Dashboards application, a hierarchy View groups device data at different aggregation
points, which are then displayed in a report. In addition to the default reports, hierarchies can also be
used in custom reports that have been created for use in different solutions.

You can use hierarchies in the Trends application to select data from a source based on its location
in the hierarchy.

Log Viewer

TIP: You can open Log Viewer from the SETTINGS > System > System Log page in Web
Applications.

Use Log Viewer to view PME system events. System events are logged by the software and its
components to record certain system activities. Examples of system events include a user logging
on, a user logging off, time synchronization sent from the system to the devices, system warnings,
and so on.

NOTE: The Log Viewer only shows system events, it does not show device-based events or
historical data.

240 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Log Viewer User Interface

Date Range Selector.

1
Select the time range for which you want to display the system log entries.
Max Records.
2
Set the maximum number of entries to be displayed in the system log table.
Minimum Priority.
Filter lower priority log entries from the system log table view.
3
The available options, in increasing priority order, are: Diagnostics, Information, Warning,
Error, Critical.
Log Type.

Filter log entries in the system log table view based on the area of the software where they
4 originated.
The available options are: All, Application (= web application components), System (=
platform components).
Category Filter.

Filter log entries in the system log table view based on the component or function they relate
5 to.
The large number of different category options is available for this filter.

TIP: Selecting the Audit category shows user login and logoff activity.

Location Filter.
6 Enter a filter string into the text box to filter the system log table view based on the Location
column information.
Message Filter.
7 Enter a filter string into the text box to filter the system log table view based on the Message
column information.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 241

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Details Filter.
8 Enter a filter string into the text box to filter the system log table view based on the Details
column information.
Column Selector.
9
Select which columns are displayed in the system log table.
Refresh.
10
Reload the content of the system log table.
Copy Selection to Clipboard.
Copy the content of selected system log table entries to the clipboard, for use in another
application. Information for all possible columns is included in the copied details, regardless
11
if the columns are displayed in the table view or not.

TIP: Use Shift + click or Ctrl + click to select multiple rows in the table.

Export

Export the content of selected system log table entries in .csv file format, for use in another
12 application. Information for all possible columns is included in the copied details, regardless
if the columns are displayed in the table view or not.

TIP: Use Shift + click or Ctrl + click to select multiple rows in the table.

Search Logs
13 Enter a filter string into the text box to filter the system log table view based on the Details
column information.
System log table
The System log table shows system events for the selected time range and filter settings.
See 1-8 above.
14
TIP: Double-click a row in the table or select a row and hit Enter to view details for this log
entry.

Number of displayed items

15 Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number for the selected time
range and filter settings. See 1-8 above.
Page selector.
16 Use the page selector to navigate between pages. Set the number of items that are
displayed on a page.

Configuring the Energy Modeling report

Before you can use the modeling report, you must first create a model for your facility or process
with the Create Model Report. This model is then used in the Use Model Report. You only use the
Create Model report during configuration. After the model has been created, you do not need to run
this report again, unless you want to create a new model.

242 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

To create a model and use the Energy Modeling report:

1. Run the Create Model report with an initial set of parameters and analyze the results. Select
No for the Save Model Configuration input parameter.

TIP: Consider choosing a reporting period with normal consumption behavior to create your
model. For example, a good period could be "Last Year".

2. Based on the results, define sub-models and exception periods, if applicable.

3. Re-run the Create Model report using sub-models, exception periods, and modified input
parameters and analyze the results.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you are satisfied with the accuracy of the model.

5. Run the Create Model report one more time, select Yes for the Save Model Configuration
and enter a meaningful model name. This saves your model to the database.

6. Run the Use Model report with the model you created. Ensure that the sub-models and
exception periods are correctly defined for the reporting period.

7. (Optional) Setup a subscription to run the Use Model report on a regular basis. Select Yes for
the Insert Date input parameter. This saves the model output data to the database. You can
use this data in the Trends and Dashboards applications.

Defining a sub-model
Sub-models are used to improve the accuracy of the overall model by recognizing time intervals or
operating conditions with different consumption characteristics. For example, using a sub-model
that differentiates between weekdays and weekend days can be more accurate for processes that
are influenced by a workweek pattern, than using a single model for all days. Which sub-model
works best depends on the nature of the facility or process.

Sub-models are defined with the Modeling Configuration tool in the Settings > System >
Modeling area of the Web Applications. Use one of the pre-defined sub-models or create your own.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 243

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To define a sub-model:

1. In Modeling Configuration, select the Sub-Models tab.

2. Click Insert in the top right corner of the window to switch to insert mode.

3. Enter a Sub-Model Name, select a Minimum Aggregation Interval, and enter a Desired
Label, and Condition in the input boxes at the top of the main display grid.

The Condition must be a valid SQL query statement.

4. Click Insert to the right of the input boxes to insert the new sub-model definition. The
definition is moved to the bottom of the main display grid, below any pre-existing sub-model
definitions.

5. Click Search in the top right corner of the window to switch back to search mode.

6. (Optional) To edit an existing definition, click Edit to the right of the definition in the display
grid, or click any of the fields of the definition in the grid. To update the definition, after editing
it, click Update , to cancel click Cancel . To delete a sub-model definition, click Delete
.

Defining exception periods

Exception periods are special time intervals, such as holidays, with unpredictable consumption
behavior that is different from the rest of the time period. Exception periods can be defined down to a
specific time interval for a specific source and measurement.

You can either choose to model these exception periods separately, which means they will become
a sub-model, or you can choose to exclude them from the model completely.

Exception periods override sub-model definitions if they cover the same time period. For example,
you could define a holiday, a day your facility was in shutdown, or a day when you performed
system tests, as an exception period. If that day was a weekend day and you are using a sub-model
to differentiate between weekdays and weekend days, then the exception period overrides the sub-
model, which means that special day will be modeled differently than a regular weekend day.

Exception periods are defined with the Modeling Configuration tool in the Settings > System >
Modeling area of the Web Applications.
To define exception periods:

1. In Modeling Configuration, select the Exception Periods tab.

2. Click Insert in the top right corner of the window to switch to insert mode.

3. Enter an Exception Period Name, select a Source and Measurement, enter a Desired
Label, and Condition in the input boxes at the top of the main display grid.

The Condition must be a valid SQL query statement.

NOTE: The Desired Label is used to control if the exception period is excluded from the
model, or if it is treated as a sub-model. Enter the text Delete as Desired Label if you want to

244 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

exclude that period from the model. Enter any other text, for example a descriptive text such
as Holiday, if you want to sub-model the exception period. An excluded exception period will
be blank in the final model output graphic.

4. Click Insert to the right of the input boxes to insert the new exception period definition. The
definition is moved to the bottom of the main display grid, below any pre-existing exception
period definitions.

5. Click Search in the top right corner of the window to switch back to search mode.

6. (Optional) To edit an existing definition, click Edit to the right of the definition in the display
grid, or click any of the fields of the definition in the grid. To update the definition, after editing
it, click Update , to cancel click Cancel . To delete an exception definition, click Delete
.

See a Model creation example.

Create Model Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Reports Module. This module requires a separate
license.

Summary
The Create Model Report is used to create a model of your facility or process. The model is then
used in the Use Model Report to compare expected consumption to actual consumption. You only
use the Create Model Report during configuration. After you created the model, you do not need to
run this report again, unless you want to create a new model.

Details
Prerequisites
To use this report, the data for the independent variables and for the dependent variable must be
available in the Power Monitoring Expert database for the reporting period. If you want to use sub-
models and exception periods, then these must be defined.

Report inputs:
Title

Type a title for the report in the text box.

Dependent Variable

The dependent variable is the measurement you want to model. For example, if you are modeling
the energy consumption of a building based on outside temperature, then the energy is the
dependent variable.

To specify the dependent variable,

1. Click Select Source and select a device from the Devices list or a Hierarchy node from the
Views list.

2. Click Select Measurement and select the measurement to be modeled.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 245

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

3. Select an aggregation method for the measurement from the Aggregation Method drop down
list.

The following aggregation methods are available:

AVG: calculates the average measurement value over the interval.

SUM: adds up the measurement values over the interval.
DELTA: subtracts the beginning measurement value from the end measurement value of the
interval.

NOTE: If you are using a Hierarchy node as a source for the dependent variable and you are using
a cumulative measurement, such as Real Energy (kWh), you must use SUM as aggregation
method. This is because the hierarchy converts the cumulative measurement into interval
measurements.
Independent Variable(s)

The independent variable is the driver that influences the measurement you want to model. For
example, if you are modeling the energy consumption of a building based on outside temperature,
then the outside temperature is the independent variable. You can specify one or more independent
variables.

To specify the independent variables,

1. Click Select Source and select a source from the list. Hierarchies are not supported for
independent variables.

2. Click Select Measurement and select the measurement.

3. Select an aggregation method for the measurement from the Aggregation Method drop down
list.

The following aggregation methods are available:

AVG: Calculates the average measurement value over the interval.

SUM: Sums the measurements values over the interval.
DELTA: Subtracts the beginning measurement value from the end measurement value of the
interval.
MIN: Selects the minimum measurement value over the interval.
MAX: Selects the minimum measurement value over the interval.
CDD: Calculates the Cooling Degree Days.
HDD: Calculates the Heating Degree Days.

For CDD or HDD, enter the base temperature in the Degree Days Base Temperature input
box that is displayed when one of these options is selected.

To add additional variables, click the + sign next to the Select Source button. Click - to remove a
variable. To enable or disable a variable, select or clear the check box next to the Select Source
button.
Reporting Period

Use this input to select the timeframe for the data you want to view in the report.

246 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Select the reporting period from the dropdown list. The timeframe options in the timeframe dropdown
are relative to the date the report is run. To run a report that starts and ends in the past, select the
fixed date option. Type a start and end date in the date boxes or click the arrows beside the dates to
display a pop-up calendar and select a date. Type a time in the time boxes or click the up and down
arrows beside the time to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

Select the timezone you want to view timestamps in.

Interval and Sub Model Configuration

Select the reporting interval from the Interval drop-down list.

Select the sub model from the Sub Model drop-down list. The options in this drop-down list depend
on the selected Interval and the sub models that have been defined in Settings > System >
Modeling.

The Database Driven option is used to define operating conditions instead of time periods for sub-
modeling. For example, you could define the condition of Power Factor < 0.8. That means that one
sub-model is used when the Power Factor is < 0.8 and a different one when it is >= 0.8. This is
similar to sub-modeling based on weekdays versus weekend days, just that the Power Factor value
is used as a condition instead of the day of the week.

When you select Database Driven, additional input boxes are displayed to select the Source,
Measurement, Key, and Value. The Key is the condition, for example for Power Factory < 0.8,
enter <0.8 in the Key input box. The Value box is just a label to identify the condition, so you could
enter Low PF for low Power Factor.

You can add one or more conditions. Click the + icon to add additional conditions.

NOTE: Conditions are applied in the order in which they are defined in the report.
Use Exception Periods

Choose to use exception periods or not by selecting Yes or No for Use Exception Periods.
Show Detailed Results

Choose to include details in the report or not by selecting Yes or No for Show Detailed Results.

Details include the calculated formulas and individual relationship between each driver and the sub
model data.
Save Model Configuration

Choose to save the created model to the database or not by selecting Yes or No for Safe Model
Configuration.

For saving the model, enter the model name in the Model Name input box that is displayed when
Yes is selected for Safe Model Configuration.

Example:
See Model creation example

To calculate the models, PME uses the Accord Framework Library which can be found at:
http://accord-framework.net/index.html.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 247

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Use Model Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Reports Module. This module requires a separate
license.

Summary
The Use Model Report shows the expected consumption of your facility or process, based on a
model created with the Create Model Report. The report shows modeled data, the measured data,
and the delta between the two. Use this report to find unexpected changes in your consumption, or
to find actual savings as a result of energy management measures.

NOTE: The report is not limited to energy consumption modeling. You can use it to model any
quantity that is dependent on drivers, for example you can model Power Factor based on power
demand.

Prerequisites
To use this report, at least one model must have been defined for your facility or process. The data
for the independent variables must be available in the Power Monitoring Expert database for the
reporting period.

Report inputs:
Title

Type a title for the report in the text box.

Choose a Model and a Reporting Aggregation Interval

Select the model you want to use for the report from the Model drop-down list.

Select the aggregation interval you want to use for the report from the Reporting Aggregation
Interval drop-down list. The options available in this drop-down list depend on the selected model.
Display Mode

Select in which form you would like to see the report output from the Display Mode drop-down list.

The following display modes are available:

Forecast: Compare the model output for the reporting period to the actually measured data for that
period, where the model was created for a baseline period in the past.
Backcast: Compare the model output for a past period to the actually measured data for that
period, where the model was created for the reporting period in the present time.

Reporting Period

Use this input to select the timeframe for the data you want to view in the report.

Select the reporting period from the dropdown list. The timeframe options in the timeframe dropdown
are relative to the date the report is run. To run a report that starts and ends in the past, select the
fixed date option. Type a start and end date in the date boxes or click the arrows beside the dates to
display a pop-up calendar and select a date. Type a time in the time boxes or click the up and down
arrows beside the time to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

Select the timezone you want to view timestamps in.

Include Measured Data

248 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Choose to include the actual data with the modeled data or not by selecting Yes or No for Include
Measured Data.
Enter an optional coefficient in % to be applied on the modeled data

(Optional) Enter coefficients that are applied to the modeled data to adjust the model output based
on known or expected changes.

For example, if you implemented an energy conservation measure on June 1, 2016 for which you
are expecting an energy saving of 15%, enter -15 as a coefficient and June 1, 2016 as the start date
from which to apply it on. All modeled data, starting with that date, will be adjusted by -15%. You
can add multiple coefficients at multiple dates. Coefficients are applied cumulatively, on top of any
previously applied coefficients.

To specify a coefficient,

1. Enter the coefficient value in percent, including the sign, in the text box.

2. Enter the date on which this coefficient takes effect into the date box.

To add additional coefficients, click the + sign next to the coefficient text box. Click - to remove a
coefficient.
Insert Data

You can save the output of the model report into the Power Monitoring Expert database and use it
for display in Dashboards and Trends. The source name created for this data in the database is
Modeled_Data.<model name>. The following measurements will be recorded for this source:

Measured: This is a copy of the dependent variable measured data.

Modeled Data: This is the data calculated by the model for the dependent variable.
Residual: This is the delta between the Measured data and the Modeled data
Residual%: This is the Residual data in percent.

To save the data into the database, select Yes for Insert Data.

TIP: Setup a subscription to run the model report weekly for the last 7 days and save the output
into the database. This will ensure you have a complete data set for modeled data for use in
Dashboards and Trends.

Example:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 249

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

TIP: Move your pointer over the chart line to see tooltips with measurement details.

NOTE: This example only shows selected content from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

To calculate the models, PME uses the Accord Framework Library which can be found at:
http://accord-framework.net/index.html

250 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Model creation example

The following example shows the process of creating a model for use with the Use Model Report. It
shows the steps for creating a basic model and then improving it iteratively.

In this example we use the report to model the HVAC related electrical energy consumption of a
building. Our goal is to create a daily model for energy consumption based on outside temperature
and humidity. We use consumption data for the year 2017 to create the model.

Model creation run 1

The dependent variable is the electrical Real Energy (kWh) measurement for the HVAC system of
the building. The independent variables are the outside temperature and humidity.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s)
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity (%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval and Sub Model Interval = Week
Configuration Sub Model = No Sub Model
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

For the first run we choose an interval of Week, only to see if there is a strong relationship between
consumption and the independent variables. Later we change this to Day to get a Daily Model.

Results:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 251

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

TIP: Move your pointer over the chart line to see tooltips with measurement details.

The model accuracy, measured by the R² value, is pretty high, which show that the model is a good
match for the correlation between the energy consumption and the outside temperature as well as
humidity.

For the next run, we use a Daily aggregation method.

Model creation run 2

We change the Interval to Day.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM

252 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Title Create Model Report

Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s)
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity (%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval and Sub Model Interval = Day
Configuration Sub Model = No Sub Model
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 253

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

The R² has dropped and the visual correlation is not very high. The charts show that there is a big
difference in consumption between weekdays and weekends. This difference cannot be explained
by outside temperature or humidity alone. For the next run we use sub-models for weekdays and
weekends.

Model creation run 3

We use a Weekday vs Weekend sub-model.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s)
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity (%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval and Sub Model Interval = Day
Configuration Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

254 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

The R² has much improved. There is a good correlation between outside temperature and humidity
and consumption. There are still a few days with a large negative residual value. Upon closer
inspection we find that most of these days are holidays. For the next run we use exception periods
to account for the holidays.

Model creation run 4

We use exception periods to account for the holidays.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 255

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Title Create Model Report

Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s)
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity (%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval and Sub Model Interval = Day
Configuration Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods Yes
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

256 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

We have again improved the model. In our example, the building is cooled electrically, which means
the greatest impact of outside temperature on energy consumption is during the cooling season. To
account for that, we change the Aggregation Method for outside temperature to Cooling Degree
Days (CDD) for the next run.

Model creation run 5

We change the Aggregation Method for outside temperature to Cooling Degree Days (CDD) with a
base temperature of 11 °C.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = CDD
Independent Variable(s)
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity (%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval and Sub Model Interval = Day
Configuration Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods Yes
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 257

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

We now have a pretty accurate model of our energy consumption based on outside temperature and
humidity.

TIP: Choose to include model creation details in the report.

Select Yes for Show Detailed Results in the Report Inputs to include information on the modeling
formulas and the relationship between the drivers and the sub model data. The following are
selected examples of the type of details you can get.

258 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Statistical information:

Weekday sub-model data driven by outside temperature vs measured data:

Weekday sub-model data driven by outside temperature with influence of humidity removed vs
measured data:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 259

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Weekend sub-model data driven by outside temperature vs measured data:

Weekend sub-model data driven by relative humidity vs measured data:

Next Step:

Run the Create Model report one last time with the Save Model Configuration parameter set to
Yes. This saves the model into the database and makes it available for use with the Use Model
Report.

User Manager

TIP: You can open User Manager from SETTINGS > Users > User Manager in the Web
Applications banner. You can also open User Manager from Management Console > Tools >
Web Tools > User Manager.

NOTE: You must have supervisor-level access to use User Manager, otherwise the link on the
SETTINGS page is not available.

Use User Manager to:

• Configure users and user groups.

• Customize user access level privileges.

• View web application user licensing information.

260 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

PME does not provide any pre-configured user accounts or user groups. One supervisor account is
created with a user defined password during the installation of the software. Create user accounts
and groups to meet your needs.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

RECOMMENDATION: Use Windows users instead of standard users in your PME system to
improve cybersecurity. Windows offers advanced user management functions, such as enforcing
password strength and limiting the number of invalid login attempts. These functions are required
for IEC 62443 compliance, the global standard for industrial automation control system security.

NOTE: To only use Windows users, replace any existing standard users in the system with
Windows users. Disallow logins for standard users in Web Applications, this disables the
supervisor user.

To configure users and user groups, see:

Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 261

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Users
A user is an account in Power Monitoring Expert (PME) that provides access to the system. A user
has a username, which must be unique, and a password. You use the username and password to
log into PME.

PME supports 3 different types of users - standard users, Windows users, and Windows groups.
The following table shows the characteristics of each user type:

User Type Characteristics

This is a PME native user account. The username, password, and
details are defined in the PME User Manager.
Standard user
Note: The email addresses defined for a user can be used for report
subscriptions.
This is an account from an external Windows system. The
Windows user username, password, and details are defined through the Windows
Active Directory or local Windows operating system.
This is a group of accounts from an external Windows system. The
Windows group username, password, and details are defined through the Windows
Active Directory or local Windows operating system.

Each user has an access level, which is set in User Manager. The access level determines which
actions the user is allowed to take in PME.

262 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

There are 5 different access levels. The highest level is Supervisor, the lowest level is Observer.
All Windows users that are a member of a Windows group in PME have the same access level as
the one set for the Windows group. For details on the permissions granted by the different access
levels see Default User Access Level Privileges.

Each user is a member of at least one user group. The user group determines which sources and
applications the user can access. By default, users are assigned to the Global user group which has
access to all sources and applications in the system. See user groups for details on how to
configure groups and assign users to groups.

Rules
The following rule applies to users in PME:

• A Windows user that is a member of multiple Windows groups with different access levels in
PME, gets the highest access level of any of the groups.

Example:

Windows user BillG is a member of Windows group A with observer access level in PME.
Windows user BillG is also a member of Windows group B with operator access level in PME.
As a result, BillG has operator access level in PME.

Limitations
The following limitations exist for standard PME users:

• Usernames must be unique in PME.

• Usernames cannot contain any of the following characters: whitespace character, < > : " / \ | ? *
, ; @ # % ' ^ & ( ) ! = + - ~ . $   

• Usernames and passwords must be between 1-50 characters long.

• Email addresses are not checked for the correct format. Any leading or trailing whitespace
characters are removed.

• Multiple email addresses must be separated by a ; (semicolon).

• First name, last name, and organization must be between 0-50 characters long. Any leading or
trailing whitespace characters are removed.

The following limitations exist for all PME users:

• A user cannot change its own access level.

• A user cannot delete its own account.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 263

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Adding a standard user

Add a standard user to create an account for accessing PME. Set the access level for the user to
control what they are allowed to do.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

264 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

RECOMMENDATION: Use Windows users instead of standard users in your PME system to
improve cybersecurity. Windows offers advanced user management functions, such as enforcing
password strength and limiting the number of invalid login attempts. These functions are required
for IEC 62443 compliance, the global standard for industrial automation control system security.

To add a standard user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Standard User.

2. In Add Standard User, enter a username and password, and assign an access level.

3. (Optional) Enter Details information.

4. Click Add.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 265

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Adding a Windows user

Add a Windows user to give this user access to PME. Set the access level for the Windows user to
control what they are allowed to do.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To add a Windows user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Windows User

2. In Add Windows User - Selection:

a. Select a domain name.

Use a Windows domain name to add a user from an Active Directory. Use the local
computer name or use localhost to add a user from the local list of Windows users.

b. To find the Windows user you want, (optional) enter a keyword into the Available
Windows Users search box, and then click Find.

The search result includes all usernames that match all or part of the keyword string.

c. In the search result table, select the Windows user you want to add, and then click Next.

3. In Add Windows User - Details, assign an access level, and then click Finish.

266 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Adding a Windows group

Add a Windows group to give all Windows users in this group access to PME. Set the access level
for the Windows group to control what they are allowed to do.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 267

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To add a Windows group:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Windows Group

2. In Add Windows Group - Selection:

a. Select a domain name.

Use a Windows domain name to add a group from an Active Directory. Use the local
computer name or use localhost to add a group from the local list of Windows groups.

b. To find the Windows group you want, (optional) enter a keyword into the Available
Windows Groups search box, and then click Find.

The search result includes all groups that match all or part of the keyword string.

c. In the search result table, select the Window group you want to add, and then click Next.

3. In Add Windows Group - Details, assign an access level.

(Optional) Click on View Windows Users in this Windows Group to see the Windows
users that are members of the group.

4. Click Finish.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

268 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing a username
Change a username to give the user a better or more meaningful name.

NOTE: You can only change the name of a standard user in User Manager. You cannot change the
name of a Windows user or group.

To change a username:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the name, and then
click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, change the name under Username to the new name, and then click
Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 269

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing a user password

Change a user password to update the password as part of a security best practice, or because the
existing password is lost.

NOTE: You can only change the password for a standard user in User Manager. You cannot
change the password for a Windows user.

270 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices for password creation and management.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access - such as least privilege, separation of
duties - vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure that user
access adheres to the site-specific cybersecurity policies.
To change a user password:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the password, and
then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, enter the new password under Password and under Confirm
Password, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 271

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing a user access level

Change a user access level to give this user higher or lower access permissions in PME.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

NOTE: When a user access level is changed, this change will be applied automatically by the
system to logged in users, after a short period of time.

To change a user access level:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the access level,
and then click Edit in this row.

3. In the Edit window, choose the new access level under Access Level, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

272 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing user details

Change user details to add additional information or update outdated information.

NOTE: You can only change the details of a standard user in User Manager. You cannot change
the details of a Windows user or group.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 273

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To change user details:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the details, and then
click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, change the details information under Details, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

274 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Deleting a user
Delete a user if this user is no longer needed, for example if someone no longer needs access to
PME.

NOTE: Windows users or groups are only removed from PME. The group or user is not deleted
from Windows.

NOTE: When a user is deleted, this user will be logged out automatically by the system after a
short period of time, if they are logged in.

To delete a user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user you want to delete, and then click Delete in this
row.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete for a standard user, or Remove for a Windows
user or group.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 275

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

User Groups
User groups determine which sources and applications users can access in Power Monitoring
Expert (PME). Each user is a member of at least one user group.

PME has two built-in groups, the Global group and the Unassigned group. Members of the Global
group can access all sources and applications in the system. Members of the Unassigned group
can access none of the sources and applications in the system. Members of the Unassigned group
are also not allowed to log into PME Web Applications.

In addition to the built-in groups, you can create any number of custom user groups in PME. Use
User Manager to create a custom group and define which sources and applications its members can
access.

NOTE: User group membership determines which sources and applications are visible to a user.
User groups do not set the user access level for the group members. Access levels are set for
each user individually as part of the user account settings.

The user group feature only applies to the Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, and Reports
applications in PME. For all other applications users have full access to all sources regardless of
their group membership.

Rules
The following rules apply to group membership in PME:

• A user is a member of at least one group.

• A user can be a member of multiple groups.

• When a new user is created, it is automatically added to the Global group.

• If a member of the Global group is added to another group, it is automatically removed from the
Global group.

• If a user is removed from the Global group without being added to a custom group, it is
automatically added to the Unassigned group.

276 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• If a user is removed from its last custom group, or this group is deleted, the user is
automatically added to the Unassigned group.

• If a member of a custom group is added to the Global group, it is automatically removed from all
custom groups.

• A supervisor-level user can only be a member of the Global group.

• If a non-supervisor level user that is a member of a custom group is promoted to supervisor, it is

automatically removed from all custom groups and added to the Global group.

• If the last custom group is deleted, all of its members are moved to the Global group.

The following rules apply to resource access by groups in PME:

• A user that is a member of multiple groups can access the sources of each group.

• If a member of a custom group is deleted or removed from the group, then this user's public
content, such as dashboards or reports, remains available to the group.

• If a member of a custom group is deleted or removed from the group, then this user's private
content, such as dashboards or reports, is only available to users in that group who have Edit
permissions on this item type.

• If a member of a custom group is removed from the group, then this user has no longer access
to any of its content, such as dashboards or reports, that was created during its group
membership.

Limitations
The following limitations exist for user groups in PME:

• The Global and Unassigned user groups cannot be renamed or deleted.

• The default settings for which sources and applications can be accessed in the Global and
Unassigned user groups cannot be changed.

• User group names must be between 1-255 characters long. Any leading or trailing whitespace
characters are removed.

• If a user group name contains a ] (left angle bracket), the bracket must be followed by a space
or be at the end of the name.

• If a user group name contains a & (ampersand), the ampersand must not be followed by a #
(hash).

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 277

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Adding a user group

Add a user group to control which sources and applications the group members can access in PME.
To add a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab, and then click Add User Group.

2. In Add User Group - User Group Name, enter a group name, and then click Next.

3. In Add User Group - Users, select the users you want to be in the new group form the list of
available users, and then click Next.

NOTE: Supervisor-level users are not included in the available users list. A supervisor-level
user can only be a member of the Global group, not a custom group.

4. In Add User Group - Sources, in the Available Sources tree, select the sources you want the
users in this group to be able to access, and then click Next.

278 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

5. In Add User Group - Applications, select the applications you want the users in this group to
be able to access.

6. Click Finish.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 279

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Adding a user to a user group

Add a user to a user group to give this user access to the sources and applications assigned to this
group in PME.
To add a user to a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group to which you want to add users, and
then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Users tab, and then, in the user table, select the user you want
to add.

NOTE: Supervisor-level users are not included in the available users list. A supervisor-level
user can only be a member of the Global group, not a custom group.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

280 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Adding sources to a user group

Add sources to a user group to give the users in this group access to these sources in PME.
To add sources to a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group to which you want to add sources,
and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Sources tab, and then, in the Available Sources tree, select
the sources you want to add.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 281

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing a user group name

Change a user group name to give this group a better or more meaningful name.
To change a user group name:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group for which you want to change the
name, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the User Group Name tab, and then change the name under
Name to the new group name.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

282 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Removing a user from a user group

Remove a user from a user group to no longer give this user access to the sources and applications
assigned to this group in PME.
To remove a user from a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group from which you want to remove a
user, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Users tab, and then, in the user table, clear the check box for
the user you want to remove.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 283

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Removing sources from a user group

Remove sources from a user group to no longer give the users in this group access to these sources
in PME.
To remove sources from a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group from which you want to remove
sources, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Sources tab.

284 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

4. In the Selected Sources list, select the source you want to remove, and then click Remove

for this source.

5. Repeat step 4 for all the sources you want to remove from the user group.

(Optional) Click Remove All to remove all sources from the group.

6. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 285

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Changing application access for a user group

Change application access for a user group to add or remove access to certain applications for the
members of this group in PME.
To change application access for a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group for which you want to change
application access, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Applications tab, and then select the check boxes for the
applications you want to add, or clear the check boxes for the applications you want to
remove.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

286 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Moving a user between user groups

Move a user to a different user group to change which sources and applications this user can
access in PME.

To move a user between two user groups, remove the user from the one group and add it to the other
group. The order in which these two tasks are performed is not important.
Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 287

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Deleting a user group

Delete a user group if this group is no longer needed, for example after all users have been removed
from the group.
To delete a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group you want to delete, and then click
Delete in this row.

3. In Delete User Group, click Delete.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

288 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Viewing Web Applications user license information

View license information to determine the number of available, free licenses left in the system. You
can also see which users have licenses issued to them, and when they were issued.

NOTE: The license information shown in the User Manager is read-only. Use the License
Configuration Tool to make changes to the Web Application user licenses in the system.

To view license information:

1. In User Manager, select the Licenses tab.

2. View license summary information in the top left area of the page. View detailed license
information in the user license table of the page.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 289

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

Customizing Access Level Privileges

Each user in PME has an access level. This access level determines the actions the user is
allowed to take in the software. There are 5 different access levels. The highest level is supervisor,
the lowest level is observer. Each access level has a default set of privileges. You can customize
many of these privileges, as shown below.

NOTE: When access level privileges are changed for a logged in user, the user must log out and
then log in again for the changes to take effect. If the logged in user's privileges are reduced, some
functionality might no longer be available to them even before they log out and back in.

To customize access level privileges:

1. In User Manager, select the Privileges tab.

2. Find the privileges and access levels you want to customize and set the desired options.

TIP: Use Search to find the privilege you are looking for based on key words.

290 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

NOTE: Only correctly licensed features and functions are displayed in the Privileges tab.

3. Click Save Privileges to apply the changed settings.

Related topics:
Users

• Users

• Adding a standard user

• Adding a Windows user

• Adding a Windows group

• Changing a username

• Changing a user password

• Changing a user access level

• Changing user details

• Deleting a user

User groups

• User Groups

• Adding a user group

• Adding a user to a user group

• Adding sources to a user group

• Changing a user group name

• Removing a user from a user group

• Removing sources from a user group

• Changing application access for a user group

• Moving a user between user groups

• Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

• Viewing Web Applications user license information

To customize user access level privileges, see:

• Customizing Access Level Privileges

For reference information see:

• User Manager

• User Manager user interface

• Default User Access Level Privileges

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 291

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

User Manager user interface

Users user interface (UI)

User Manager Help.

1
Click Help to open the online help.
Users, User Groups, and Licenses tabs.
2
Click a tab to open the associated screen.
Add Standard User, Add Windows User, and Add Windows Group buttons.
3
Click a button to activate its function.
Search Users box.
4
Enter a search string to find users in the users table.
Users table.
5
Shows the existing users in the system.
Edit and Delete icons.
6
Click Edit to make changes to this user. Click Delete to delete this user.
Number of displayed users.
7
Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number of items in the system.
Page selector.
8
Navigate between pages. Set the number of items that are displayed on a page.

User Groups UI

Add User Group button.

1
Click the button to add a new user group.

292 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

User Group table.

2
This table shows the existing user groups in the system.

Licenses UI

1 Web Applications User Licenses Summary.

2 Licenses table.

Privileges UI

Save Privileges and Reset Privileges buttons

1 Click a button to activate its function. Note: Reset Privileges resets all access level privileges
to their system defaults. See Default User Access Level Privileges for details.
2 Privileges table.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 293

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Default User Access Level Privileges

The access level that is assigned to a user in Power Monitoring Expert determines the permissions
this user has in the system. There are five access levels - Observer, User, Controller, Operator, and
Supervisor. Certain default privileges are assigned to the different access levels. Some of these
privileges are configurable. See Customizing Access Level Privileges for details.

NOTE: Access to the web applications is controlled through user group settings. If a user group
does not have access to a web application, then the group members cannot access this
application regardless of their user access permissions.

The following table shows the system default privileges assigned to the different access levels:

Configurable Application Privilege Observer User Controller Operator Supervisor*

Yes Alarm Views Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Alarms Access the application No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Alarms Acknowledge alarms No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Alarms Create new alarm views No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Alarms Delete any alarm view No No No No Yes

Yes Alarms Edit any alarm view No No No No Yes

Set system default alarm

Yes Alarms No No No No Yes
view

Yes Alarms View incidents No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Authorized Hosts Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Breaker Configuration Tool Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes Cloud Agent Manager Access the tool No No No No Yes

Yes Dashboards Access the application Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Dashboards Create new dashboards No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Dashboards Delete any dashboard No No No No Yes

Yes Dashboards Edit any dashboard No No No No Yes

Yes Dashboards Manage slideshows No No Yes Yes Yes

Set system default

Yes Dashboards No No No No Yes
dashboard

Yes Dashboards View slideshow list Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Deactivate Alarms Access the tool No No No No Yes

Yes Device Manager Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Device Type and Driver

Yes Access the tool No No No No Yes
Package Installer

Yes Diagnostic Viewer Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Diagnostics and Services Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Diagrams Access the application Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Diagrams Create new diagrams No No No No Yes

294 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Configurable Application Privilege Observer User Controller Operator Supervisor*

Yes Diagrams Delete any diagram No No No No Yes

Yes Diagrams Edit any diagram No No No No Yes

Yes Diagrams Set system default diagram No No No No Yes

Yes Diagrams (Standalone) Access the application Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Event Watcher Access the tool No No No No Yes

Yes EWS Login Access the settings No No No No Yes

Generator Performance
Yes Access the tool No No No Yes Yes
Configuration Tool

Generator Power Configuration

Yes Access the tool No No No Yes Yes
Utility

Yes Hierarchy Manager Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Insulation Monitoring
Yes Access the tool No No No Yes Yes
Configuration Tool

Yes Log Viewer Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes Logical Device Type Editor Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes Login Options Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Management Console Access the application No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Management Console Configure system No No No Yes Yes

Connect/disconnect sites
Yes Management Console No No Yes Yes Yes
and devices

Yes Manual Data Editor Access the tool No No No No Yes

Modbus Gateway Service

Yes Access the tool No No No No Yes
Configuration

Yes Modeling Configuration Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Notifications Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes Personal Preferences Access the settings No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power Losses Configuration

Yes Access the tool No No No Yes Yes
Utility

Yes Rate Editor Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Realtime and OPC Diagnostics Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes Registration Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Report Theme Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Reports Access the application Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Reports Create new reports No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Reports Delete any report No No No No Yes

Yes Reports Edit any report No No No No Yes

Manage report
Yes Reports No Yes Yes Yes Yes
subscriptions

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 295

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

Configurable Application Privilege Observer User Controller Operator Supervisor*

Yes Security Options Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Session Timeout Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Software Alarms Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes System Language Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes System Theme Access the settings No No No No Yes

Yes Time of Use Editor Access the tool No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Trends Access the application Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Trends Create new trends No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Trends Delete any trend No No No No Yes

Yes Trends Edit any trend No No No No Yes

Yes Upload Report Template Access the tool No No No No Yes

Yes UPS Configuration Tool Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes UPS Power Configuration Utility Access the tool No No No Yes Yes

Yes User Manager** Access the tool No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Add user groups No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Add users No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Delete any user No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Delete any user group No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Edit any user No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** Edit any user group No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** View user groups No No No No Yes

Yes User Manager** View users No No No No Yes

* Supervisor access level has all privileges. This is not configurable.

** User Manager privileges are not configurable.

System and personal localization settings

NOTE: The language settings in System Language and Personal Preferences determine the
language the web applications are displayed in.

By default, the localization settings in Personal Preferences are the same as the ones in System
Language. Changes to the settings in System Language are automatically copied to the Personal
Preferences settings as long as the Personal Preferences settings have never been customized.
After you customized the Personal Preferences localization settings once, they will no longer
change when the System Language settings are changed.

NOTE: Your personal localization settings overrule the system localization settings for your user
account.

296 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Example 1: Language settings in Personal Preferences follow System Language if they have never
been customized.

Condition Language Settings Comments

This is assuming the software
System Language: English
Default was installed as an English
Personal Preferences: English
system.
The Personal Preferences
Change System Language System Language: French
language settings follow the
to French Personal Preferences: French
System Language settings.

Example 2: Personal Preferences remain at customized setting after having been customized at
some point.

Condition Language Settings Comments

This is assuming the software
System Language: English
Default was installed as an English
Personal Preferences: English
system.
Change Personal System Language: English The Personal Preferences have
Preferences to French Personal Preferences: French been customized.
The settings are back to their
Change Personal System Language: English defaults, but the Personal
Preferences back to English Personal Preferences: English Preferences had been
customized.
The Personal Preferences
Change System Language System Language: French language settings no longer
to French Personal Preferences: English follow the System Language
settings.

Customizing the Web Applications links

By default, Web Applications shows the following application links: Dashboards, Diagrams,
Trends, Alarms, Reports, Settings. You can add custom links, hide/unhide links, re-order links, and
delete links.

Default links:

Example customized links:

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 297

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

NOTICE
INOPERABLE DATABASE
Back up the database before executing SQL scripts.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in an inoperable database and loss of data.

To add a custom link:

1. On the PME application server, find the Add_PQPerf_To_Web.sql script file in

...\Power Monitoring Expert\diagnostic\PowerQuality\

2. On the database server, open SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS).

3. Open the Add_PQPerf_To_Web.sql script in SSMS.

NOTE: You can also copy and paste the example script below into SSMS.

4. Update the script settings, in the marked areas in the script, to meet your needs.

NOTE: The order value determines the order in which the links are arranged in the web page
banner. The order numbers increase from left to right. The numbers for the default links are:
Dashboards (10), Diagrams (20), Trends (30), Alarms (40), Reports (50). The location of the
SETTINGS link is not controlled by the order value. It is always in the right most position.

5. Execute the script on the ApplicationModules database.

TIP: You can execute this query repeatedly to change any of the settings for the custom link.

6. Close SSMS.

7. Reload Web Applications if it is open in a browser.

Example script to create a MY CUSTOM LINK link between the REPORTS and SETTINGS links in
the Web Applications banner that opens a custom web page:

298 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

USE ApplicationModules
DECLARE @id NVARCHAR(255)
DECLARE @name NVARCHAR(255)
DECLARE @displayName NVARCHAR(255)
DECLARE @description NVARCHAR(255)
DECLARE @order NVARCHAR(100)
DECLARE @target NVARCHAR(400)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Edit the following values to define your custom settings
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Custom application link (internal) name.
SET @id = 'MyCustomLink'
-- Custom application link description
SET @description = 'My custom link shows my custom content'
-- Display Name
set @displayName = 'My Custom Link'

-- Custom application link order. Less than 10 will bring new link to
-- first left position.
SET @order = 60
-- Target URL can be provided in single quote here,
-- e.g. 'https://www.mypage.com'
-- If on the same machine, should be the relative path.
-- e.g., '/myApp/index.html'
SET @target = 'https://www.mypage.com'

----------------------------------------------------------------------
-- DO NOT MODIFY CONTENT BELOW
----------------------------------------------------------------------
DECLARE @configurationValue NVARCHAR(MAX)
SET @configurationValue =
'<FrameworkApplication id="' + @id + '"'
+ ' displayName="' + @displayName + '"'
+ ' description="' + @description + '"'
+ ' resourceSet="ApplicationFrameworkResources"'
+ ' target="' + @target + '"'
+ ' privilege=""'
+ ' order="' + @order + '"'
+ ' enabled="true"'
+ ' xmlns="uri:application-modules/power/framework/application#" />'
EXECUTE [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].[WriteConfigurationValue]
'ApplicationFramework'
,'Applications'
,@id
,@description
,@configurationValue
,NULL
,0

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 299

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

To hide or unhide a link:

1. On the database server, open SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS).

2. Copy the following SQL script into a query window in SSMS:

SELECT *
FROM [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].[ConfigurationSettings]
WHERE ItemType ='ApplicationFramework' AND Item = 'Applications'

3. Execute the query on the ApplicationModules database. This returns the settings for the Web
Applications links.

4. Copy the content of the Value column for the link you want to hide or unhide, into a text editing
tool such as Notepad. For example:
<FrameworkApplication id="MyCustomLink" displayName="My Custom
Link" description="My custom link shows my custom content"
resourceSet="ApplicationFrameworkResources"
target="https://www.mypage.com" privilege="" order="60"
enabled="true" xmlns="uri:application-
modules/power/framework/application#" />

5. Change the enabled property value to "false" in the text editor to hide a link, or to "true" if to
unhide a link

6. Copy the following SQL script into a query window in SSMS:

UPDATE [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].
[ConfigurationSettings]
SET Value = '<Copy entire data from notepad with the modified
enabled property here>'
WHERE [key]= '<Type the custom application link (internal) name
here, in our example this is MyCustomLink>'

7. Update the query settings as described in the script above.

8. Execute the script on the ApplicationModules database.

9. (Optional) Repeat steps 4-8 to hide or unhide additional links.

10. Close SSMS.

11. Reload the Web Applications if they are open in a browser.

To re-order links:

1. On the database server, open SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS).

2. Copy the following SQL script into a query window in SSMS:

SELECT *
FROM [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].[ConfigurationSettings]
WHERE ItemType ='ApplicationFramework' AND Item = 'Applications'

3. Execute the query on the ApplicationModules database. This returns the settings for the Web
Applications links.

300 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

4. Copy the content of the Value column for the link you want to reorder, into a text editing tool
such as Notepad. For example:
<FrameworkApplication id="MyCustomLink" displayName="My Custom
Link" description="My custom link shows my custom content"
resourceSet="ApplicationFrameworkResources"
target="https://www.mypage.com" privilege="" order="60"
enabled="true" xmlns="uri:application-
modules/power/framework/application#" />

5. Change the order property value to a new value in the text editor.

NOTE: The order value determines the order in which the links are arranged in the web page
banner. The order numbers increase from left to right. The numbers for the default links are:
Dashboards (10), Diagrams (20), Trends (30), Alarms (40), Reports (50). The location of the
SETTINGS link is not controlled by the order value. It is always in the right most position.

6. Copy the following SQL script into a query window in SSMS:

UPDATE [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].
[ConfigurationSettings]
SET Value = '<Copy entire data from notepad with the modified
order property here>'
WHERE [key]= '<Type the custom application link (internal) name
here, in our example this is MyCustomLink>'

7. Update the query settings as described in the script above.

8. Execute the script on the ApplicationModules database.

9. (Optional) Repeat steps 4-8 to re-order additional links.

10. Close SSMS.

11. Reload the Web Applications if they are open in a browser.

To delete a link:

1. On the database server, open SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS).

2. Copy the following SQL script into a query window in SSMS:

DELETE FROM [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].
[ConfigurationValue]
WHERE ConfigurationKeyId = (Select id from [ApplicationModules].
[Configuration].[ConfigurationKey] where Name='<Type the custom
application link (internal) name here, in our example this is
MyCustomLink>')
DELETE FROM [ApplicationModules].[Configuration].
[ConfigurationKey]
WHERE Name='<Type the custom application link (internal) name
here, in our example this is MyCustomLink>'

3. Update the query settings as described in the script above.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 301

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

4. Execute the query on the ApplicationModules database. This deletes the Web Applications
link.

5. (Optional) Repeat steps 3-4 to delete additional links.

6. Close SSMS.

7. Reload the Web Applications if they are open in a browser.

302 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide Reference

Web security changes

The Generate Authentication URL page allows for generating destination URL types that can be
used in Building Operation. This section provides instructions for enabling the page and describes
the function of the various components.

User authentication
PME Web applications require user authentication to launch. There are multiple methods to access
a PME Web application from inside another EcoStruxure supervisor software:

• Manual PME Authentication: The user must enter PME user credentials into a login window
before a PME Web application can launch. These credentials are then cached for the rest of the
PME session.

• Automatic PME Authentication: (less secure) Specific URL addresses are created for the
target PME web application. When one of these PME URLs is used to launch a PME Web
application from another supervisory software, PME automatically allows access without
prompting the user to enter PME credentials. This method provides a seamless user
experience, but it does not provide the security level of the Manual Authentication method. For
security reasons, supervisor-level user names cannot be used.

• Windows Authentication: (more secure) Logs the user into PME using their current Windows
credentials. This method provides a seamless user experience and is more secure.

NOTE: The Windows Authentication option is more secure but requires that Power Monitoring
Expert has been configured with Windows Active Directory users and user groups.

When testing the generated authentication URL, test the URL in a separate browser session, not
just in a separate tab in the current browser. Otherwise, your current login credentials may be used,
or you may be logged out of this page altogether.

To open a new browser session in Internet Explorer, open the File menu and select New Session. If
you are using Chrome, open a new incognito window.

Setting Up User Authentication with Windows Active Directory in Building

Operation
TIP: For information on setting up user authentication with Windows Active Directory in PME, see
Adding a Windows user and Adding a Windows group.

To link Windows Active Directory to a Building Operation Domain:

1. Log on to WorkStation

2. Open Control Panel

3. Click Domains

4. Click Add

5. Give it a name, then click Next

6. In the Authentication window, type the Active Directory Windows domain name (for example,
Example.org). Click Next.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 303

Reference EcoStruxure™ PME/EBO Integration Solution Guide

7. Do not add domain members. Click Next.

8. Leave the default Domain Policies of 9 login attempts

9. Click Create

To add the Active Directory user groups to the Building Operation Domain:

1. In the System view, right-click the Groups in the new Domain

2. Click New > User Account Group

3. Ignore the Users page. Click Next.

4. Add the default workspace. Click Next.

5. (optional) adjust the policies.

6. click ... for the Windows group name field.

7. Select the AD user group from the list and click OK.

8. Click Create.

To give the User Group permissions in Building Operation:

1. Open the user group.

2. Select the Permissions tab

3. Click + to add a path permissions line

4. Assign read permissions (or more, if needed).

5. Save the changes

To log on to WorkStation with a Windows account:

1. Log into Windows / Remote Desktop with the Windows user

2. Open WorkStation and enter your Windows credentials or select to log on as the currently
signed-in Windows account. Click Log on.

304 © 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison
France

+33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00

www.se.com

As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.

© 2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

7EN02-0464-00 05/2021